OSP-P200L Macturn+Multus Series Operation Manual LE32-114-R4

CNC SYSTEM

OSP-P200LMACTURN/MULTUS SeriesOPERATION MANUAL(4th Edition)Pub No. 5262-E-R3 (LE32-114-R4) Feb. 2007

5262-E P-(i)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSThe machine is equipped with safety devices which serve to protect personnel and the machine itself fromhazards arising from unforeseen accidents. However, operators must not rely exclusively on these safetydevices: they must also become fully familiar with the safety guidelines presented below to ensure accident-free operation.This instruction manual and the warning signs attached to the machine cover only those hazards whichOkuma can predict. Be aware that they do not cover all possible hazards.

1. Precautions Relating to Installation(1) Please be noted about a primary power supply as follows.

• Do not draw the primary power supply from a distribution panel that also supplies a majornoise source (for example, an electric welder or electric discharge machine) since thiscould cause malfunction of the CNC unit.

• If possible, connect the machine to a ground not used by any other equipment. If there isno choice but to use a common ground, the other equipment must not generate a largeamount of noise (such as an electric welder or electric discharge machine).

(2) Installation EnvironmentObserve the following points when installing the control enclosure.

• Make sure that the CNC unit will not be subject to direct sunlight.

• Make sure that the control enclosure will not be splashed with chips, water, or oil.

• Make sure that the control enclosure and operation panel are not subject to excessivevibrations or shock.

• The permissible ambient temperature range for the control enclosure is 5 to 40°C.

• The permissible ambient humidity range for the control enclosure is relative humidity 50%or less at 40°C (no condensation).

• The maximum altitude at which the control enclosure can be used is 1000 m (3281ft.).

2. Points to Check before Turning on the Power(1) Close all the doors of the control enclosure and operation panel to prevent the entry of water,

chips, and dust.

(2) Make absolutely sure that there is nobody near the moving parts of the machine, and that thereare no obstacles around the machine, before starting machine operation.

(3) When turning on the power, turn on the main power disconnect switch first, then the CONTROLON switch on the operation panel.

5262-E P-(ii)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

3. Precautions Relating to Manual/Continuous Operation (1) Follow the instruction manual during operation.

(2) Do not operate the machine with the front cover, chuck cover, or another protective coverremoved.

(3) Close the front cover before starting the machine.

(4) When machining the initial workpiece, check for machine operations, run the machine under noload to check for interference among components, cut the workpiece in the single block mode,and then start continuous operation.

(5) Ensure your safety before rotating the spindle or moving a machine part.

(6) Do not touch chips or workpiece while the spindle is rotating.

(7) Do not stop a rotating part with hand or another means.

(8) Check that the condition of hydraulic chuck jaws as mounted, operating pressure, and maxi-mum permissible revolving speed.

(9) Check the condition and location of the cutting tool as mounted.

(10) Check the tool offset value.

(11) Check the zero offset value.

(12) Check that the SPINDLE OVERRIDE and FEEDRATE OVERRIDE dials on the NC operationpanel are set to 100%.

(13) When moving the turret, check the software limits for X- and Z-axes or the locations of limitswitch dogs to prevent interference with the chuck and tailstock.

(14) Check the location of the turret.

(15) Check the location of the tailstock.

(16) Cut workpieces with a transmitted power and torque within the permissible range.

(17) Chuck each workpiece firmly.

(18) Check that the coolant nozzle is properly located.

4. Precautions Relating to the ATC(1) The tool clamps of the magazine, spindle, etc., are designed for reliability, but it is possible that

a tool could be released and fall in the event of an unforeseen accident, exposing you todanger: do not touch or approach the ATC mechanism during ATC operation.

(2) Always inspect and change tools in the magazine in the manual magazine interrupt mode.

(3) Remove chips adhering to the magazine at appropriate intervals since they can causemisoperation. Do not use compressed air to remove these chips since it will only push the chipsfurther in.

(4) If the ATC stops during operation for some reason and it has to be inspected without turning thepower off, do not touch the ATC since it may start moving suddenly.

5262-E P-(iii)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

5. On Finishing Work(1) On finishing work, clean the vicinity of the machine.

(2) Return the ATC, APC and other equipment to the predetermined retraction position.

(3) Always turn off the power to the machine before leaving it.

(4) To turn off the power, turn off the CONTROL ON switch on the operation panel first, then themain power disconnect switch.

6. Precautions during Maintenance Inspection and When Trouble OccursIn order to prevent unforeseen accidents, damage to the machine, etc., it is essential to observe thefollowing points when performing maintenance inspections or during checking when trouble hasoccurred.

(1) When trouble occurs, press the emergency stop button on the operation panel to stop themachine.

(2) Consult the person responsible for maintenance to determine what corrective measures needto be taken.

(3) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate toconfirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

(4) Use only the specified replacement parts and fuses.

(5) Always turn the power off before starting inspection or changing parts.

(6) When parts are removed during inspection or repair work, always replace them as they wereand secure them properly with their screws, etc.

(7) When carrying out inspections in which measuring instruments are used - for example voltagechecks - make sure the instrument is properly calibrated.

(8) Do not keep combustible materials or metals inside the control enclosure or terminal box.

(9) Check that cables and wires are free of damage: damaged cables and wires will cause currentleakage and electric shocks.

(10) Maintenance inside the Control Enclosure

a. Switch the main power disconnect switch OFF before opening the control enclosure door.

b. Even when the main power disconnect switch is OFF, there may some residual charge inthe MCS drive unit (servo/spindle), and for this reason only service personnel are permittedto perform any work on this unit. Even then, they must observe the following precautions.

• MCS drive unit (servo/spindle)The residual voltage discharges two minutes after the main switch is turned OFF.

5262-E P-(iv)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

c. The control enclosure contains the NC unit, and the NC unit has a printed circuit boardwhose memory stores the machining programs, parameters, etc. In order to ensure that thecontents of this memory will be retained even when the power is switched off, the memoryis supplied with power by a battery. Depending on how the printed circuit boards are han-dled, the contents of the memory may be destroyed and for this reason only service per-sonnel should handle these boards.

(11) Periodic Inspection of the Control Enclosure

a. Cleaning the cooling unitThe cooling unit in the door of the control enclosure serves to prevent excessive tempera-ture rise inside the control enclosure and increase the reliability of the NC unit. Inspect thefollowing points every three months.

• Is the fan motor inside the cooling unit working?The motor is normal if there is a strong draft from the unit.

• Is the external air inlet blocked?If it is blocked, clean it with compressed air.

7. General Precautions(1) Keep the vicinity of the machine clean and tidy.

(2) Wear appropriate clothing while working, and follow the instructions of someone with sufficienttraining.

(3) Make sure that your clothes and hair cannot become entangled in the machine. Machine opera-tors must wear safety equipment such as safety shoes and goggles.

(4) Machine operators must read the instruction manual carefully and make sure of the correct pro-cedure before operating the machine.

(5) Memorize the position of the emergency stop button so that you can press it immediately at anytime and from any position.

(6) Do not access the inside of the control panel, transformer, motor, etc., since they contain high-voltage terminals and other components which are extremely dangerous.

(7) If two or more persons must work together, establish signals so that they can communicate toconfirm safety before proceeding to each new step.

5262-E P-(v)SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

8. Symbols Used in ManualThe following warning indications are used in this manual to draw attention to information of particu-lar importance. Read the instructions marked with these symbols carefully and follow them.

indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moder-ate injury.

indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to your property.

indicates general instructions for safe operation.

DANGER

WARNING

CAUTION

CAUTION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

5262-E P-(i)INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTIONThank you very much for choosing our CNC system. This numerical control system is a expandable CNCwith various features . Major features of the CNC system are described below.

(1) Compact and highly reliableThe CNC system has become compact and highly reliable because of advanced hardware technology,including computer boards equipped with high-speed micro processors, I/O link, and servo link. The‘variable software’ as a technical philosophy of the OSPs supported by a hard disk. Functions may beadded to the CNC system as required after delivery.

(2) NC operation panelsThe following types of NC operation panels are offered to improve the user-friendliness.

• Thin color operation panels (horizontal)

• Thin color operation panels (vertical)One or more of the above types may not be used for some models.

(3) Machining management functionsThese functions contribute to the efficient operation of the CNC system and improve the profitability fromsmall quantity production of multiple items and variable quantity production of variations. Major controlfunctions are described below.

a. Reduction of setup timeWith increase in small-volume production, machining data setting is more frequently needed. Thesimplified file operation facilitates such troublesome operation. The documents necessary for setup,such as work instructions, are displayed on the CNC system to eliminate the necessity of controllingdrawings and further reduce the setup time.

b. Production Status MonitorThe progress and operation status can be checked on a real-time basis on the screen of the CNCsystem.

c. Reduction of troubleshooting timeCorrect information is quickly available for troubleshooting.

(4) Help functions When an alarm is raised, press the help key to view the content of the alarm. This helps take quick action against the alarm.

To operate the CNC system to its maximum performance, thoroughly read and understand this instructionmanual before use.Keep this instruction manual at hand so that it will be available when you need a help.

Screens

Different screens are used for different models. Therefore, the screens used on your CNC system may differ from those shown in this manual.

5262-E P-(i)TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION.............................................................................1

1. Overview.................................................................................................................................. 1

2. Turret Indexing Control ............................................................................................................ 22-1. Turret Index Position ........................................................................................................ 22-2. Turret Number Assignment .............................................................................................. 32-3. Turret Indexing Turret Control .......................................................................................... 4

3. Turret B-axis Positioning Control ............................................................................................. 53-1. B-axis Positioning ............................................................................................................. 53-2. Movable Range of the B-axis ........................................................................................... 53-3. Precautions for B-axis positioning control ........................................................................ 6

4. Turret Indexing Commands ..................................................................................................... 74-1. Command Systems .......................................................................................................... 74-2. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers ............................................................. 74-3. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers ........................................................ 74-4. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers .................................................. 84-5. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers ............................................. 84-6. Base cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers .......................................................... 84-7. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers...................................................... 94-8. ATC Position Indexing by Turret Numbers ....................................................................... 94-9. Independent Direction of the Tool Compensation Number, the Nose R Com-

pensation Number, and the Tool Diameter Compensation Number................................. 9

5. Turret B-axis Positioning Commands .................................................................................... 105-1. Command Systems ........................................................................................................ 105-2. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TL Command.......................... 115-3. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TG Command ......................... 115-4. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the T Command............................ 125-5. Independent Command for Positioning B-axis ............................................................... 125-6. Turret Rotary Position Offset Command in B-axis Positioning (G52) ............................. 135-7. Terms Relevant to Turret Rotary Position Compensation .............................................. 14

6. Manual Turret Indexing Operation ......................................................................................... 156-1. Turret Indexing Position.................................................................................................. 156-2. H1 Turret ........................................................................................................................ 15

7. Manual B-axis Positioning Operation..................................................................................... 167-1. Positioning the B-axis ..................................................................................................... 167-2. Canceling B-axis positioning .......................................................................................... 167-3. BA Angle Data Display ................................................................................................... 17

8. Manual Slant Feed Function.................................................................................................. 188-1. Designating a Slant Feed Direction ................................................................................ 188-2. Selecting Slant Feed, Feed Operation ........................................................................... 198-3. Caution on Recovering from Manual Intervention .......................................................... 208-4. Relationship with the Slant Compound Fixed Cycle Function ........................................ 20

5262-E P-(ii)TABLE OF CONTENTS

8-5. Others............................................................................................................................. 20

9. Tool Index Function ............................................................................................................... 219-1. Relation between Turret Indexing and Tool Indexing ..................................................... 219-2. Relation between Tool Indexing and Graphic Display.................................................... 219-3. Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation ................................. 229-4. Tool Index Commands ................................................................................................... 229-5. Relation between Rotary Tool and Tool Index Commands ............................................ 22

10.Parameter Settings ................................................................................................................ 2310-1.B-axis User Parameters ................................................................................................ 2310-2.B-axis System Parameters ............................................................................................ 2310-3.Turret Position Error Compensation .............................................................................. 2310-4.B-axis Indexing Angles .................................................................................................. 2310-5.M-axis Orientation ......................................................................................................... 2410-6.System Parameters ....................................................................................................... 2410-7.Optional Parameters...................................................................................................... 2510-8.Machine System Parameters ........................................................................................ 25

11.Tool Data Setting ................................................................................................................... 2611-1.Tool Shape Data............................................................................................................ 2611-2.Tool Compensation ....................................................................................................... 2711-3.Tool Life Management (Special Function)..................................................................... 28

12.Tool Compensation Multi-System Function ........................................................................... 2912-1.Combinations of Compensation Systems...................................................................... 2912-2.Tool Compensation Data Structure ............................................................................... 3012-3.Selecting the TOOL COMPENSATION Screen with the Tool Compensation

Multi-system Function..................................................................................................... 3212-4.Tool Life Management Tool Information Screen for the Tool Compensation

Multi-system Function..................................................................................................... 3212-5.System Variables........................................................................................................... 33

13.Other Functions ..................................................................................................................... 3413-1.Tool Compensation Automatic Calculation Function..................................................... 3413-2.Turret Coolant Interlock ................................................................................................. 3413-3.Data Input/Output Function ........................................................................................... 3513-4.Interlock ......................................................................................................................... 37

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION ..................................................................................38

1. Overview................................................................................................................................ 38

2. Machine Specifications .......................................................................................................... 382-1. Outline of the Machine.................................................................................................... 382-2. Machine Operation ......................................................................................................... 412-3. ATC Operation................................................................................................................ 42

3. ATC Logic Tables .................................................................................................................. 443-1. Input Logic Tables .......................................................................................................... 443-2. Output Logic Tables ....................................................................................................... 453-3. Manual Interlock Tables ................................................................................................. 45

5262-E P-(iii)TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. Manual Operation .................................................................................................................. 464-1. Manual Magazine Operation .......................................................................................... 464-2. Manual ATC Operation................................................................................................... 55

5. ATC Program Commands ..................................................................................................... 595-1. ATC Commands ............................................................................................................. 595-2. ATC Macro Commands .................................................................................................. 615-3. Others............................................................................................................................. 625-4. Example Programs ......................................................................................................... 63

6. Automatic Operation .............................................................................................................. 676-1. Sequence Return Procedure .......................................................................................... 676-2. Cautions on Using the Program Check/Graphic Scale Automatic Setting Func-

tion while in Machine Lock Status .................................................................................. 69

7. Data Setting ........................................................................................................................... 717-1. Magazine Information ..................................................................................................... 717-2. Tool Information.............................................................................................................. 74

8. ATC Status Display................................................................................................................ 758-1. ATC Status Display Screen ............................................................................................ 758-2. Tool Data Display Screen............................................................................................... 778-3. Machine Diagnosis Screen............................................................................................. 788-4. ATC Input/Output Display Screen .................................................................................. 81

9. Parameter Setting.................................................................................................................. 829-1. ATC Tool Change Position and Movable Range............................................................ 829-2. Magazine Axis Parameter .............................................................................................. 839-3. EC–axis (Tool Change Arm Rotation Axis) Parameter................................................... 849-4. EZ–axis (Tool Change Advance/Retraction Rotation Axis) Parameter (MUL-

TUS-B300/B400) ............................................................................................................ 849-5. Positioning Point EC (MULTUS-B300/B400).................................................................. 859-6. Positioning Point EZ (MULTUS-B300/B400) .................................................................. 859-7. Turret Index Angle .......................................................................................................... 859-8. Magazine Panel Communication Parameter .................................................................. 869-9. Setting the Tool Change Arm Rotation Positions Immediately after Installing

the Control Software (MULTUS-B300/B400).................................................................. 879-10.Cam Shaft Timing Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-1) .......................... 889-11.Step Division Parameter................................................................................................ 899-12.ATC Tool Change Arm (Machine System Parameter No.18-2)..................................... 909-13.Tool Change Arm Torque Limit Parameter (Machine System Parameter

No.18-3).......................................................................................................................... 909-14.Tool Change Arm Override 1 (Machine System Parameter No.18-4) ........................... 909-15.Tool Change Arm Override 2, 3 (Machine System Parameter No.18-5, 6) ................... 91

10.System Check........................................................................................................................ 9210-1.System Check Mode Parameters.................................................................................. 9210-2.ATC Parameters............................................................................................................ 9410-3.Manual ATC Operation.................................................................................................. 97

11.Others .................................................................................................................................. 10011-1.G and M Code Macro Functions.................................................................................. 100

5262-E P-(iv)TABLE OF CONTENTS

11-2.ATC Macro Command Subprograms .......................................................................... 10211-3.Optical In–process Workpiece Gauging Specification (Optional Specification).............. 10811-4.At the Occurrence of ATC Failure ............................................................................... 109

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL ...............................................................................112

1. OUTLINE Y-AXIS CONTROL.............................................................................................. 1121-1. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 112

2. OPERATION........................................................................................................................ 1132-1. MACHINE OPERATION............................................................................................... 1132-2. MANUAL OPERATION ................................................................................................ 1162-3. MDI OPERATION......................................................................................................... 1182-4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION .......................................................................................... 1182-5. NC OPERATION PANEL DISPLAY ............................................................................. 1192-6. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS .......................................................................................... 121

3. PROGRAMMING................................................................................................................. 1303-1. OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................. 1303-2. Y-AXIS CONTROL COMMANDS................................................................................. 1303-3. Y-AXIS COMPOUND FIXED CYCLES ........................................................................ 134

4. Slant Machining Mode Function .......................................................................................... 1454-1. Overview....................................................................................................................... 1454-2. Coordinate System for Slant Machining ....................................................................... 1464-3. Slant Machining Mode Commands............................................................................... 1484-4. Functions Usable in Slant Machining Mode ................................................................. 1494-5. Zero Point Shift Macro Command ................................................................................ 1524-6. Actual Position Display ................................................................................................. 153

5. DATA OPERATION ............................................................................................................. 1545-1. DATA OPERATION...................................................................................................... 154

6. PARAMETER ...................................................................................................................... 1616-1. PARAMETER ............................................................................................................... 161

7. APPENDIX........................................................................................................................... 1657-1. Y-AXIS MACHINING EXAMPLES (FOR A-TURRET SIDE ONLY).............................. 165

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION ...............................................................169

1. Overview.............................................................................................................................. 1691-1. Overview....................................................................................................................... 1691-2. Machine Configuration.................................................................................................. 1691-3. Coordinate System ....................................................................................................... 170

2. Operation Panels ................................................................................................................. 1712-1. Basic Configuration of Operation Panels...................................................................... 1712-2. Option Panel for Sub-spindle Machines ....................................................................... 1722-3. Brief Explanation of the Panels .................................................................................... 173

3. Manual Operation ................................................................................................................ 1753-1. Operations Related to the Spindle 1 (Main Spindle) .................................................... 175

5262-E P-(v)TABLE OF CONTENTS

3-2. Operations Related to the Spindle 2 (Sub Spindle) ...................................................... 1773-3. Axis Feed Operation (X–, Z–, C–, and W–axis) ........................................................... 1793-4. M-TOOL SPINDLE OPERATION ................................................................................. 1823-5. Other Manual Operations ............................................................................................. 184

4. MDI/Automatic Operation .................................................................................................... 1854-1. Coordinate System Selection ....................................................................................... 1854-2. MDI Operation .............................................................................................................. 1864-3. Automatic Operation..................................................................................................... 186

5. Additional Functions ............................................................................................................ 1875-1. Workpiece Transfer Function from the Main Spindle to the Sub Spindle ..................... 1875-2. Z–axis Mirror Image...................................................................................................... 1885-3. Interlock (for two-saddle models only) .......................................................................... 1925-4. W-axis Cutting Function (Optional)............................................................................... 193

6. Programming ....................................................................................................................... 1956-1. Coordinate System ....................................................................................................... 1956-2. Program Commands .................................................................................................... 197

7. Data Operation .................................................................................................................... 1997-1. Zero Setting .................................................................................................................. 199

8. Description of Parameters ................................................................................................... 2038-1. System Parameters ...................................................................................................... 2038-2. User Parameters .......................................................................................................... 2048-3. Chuck Parameters........................................................................................................ 2058-4. Machine System Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)............................................................. 2078-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant) ................................................................. 2108-6. Machine User Parameter (Chuck) ................................................................................ 2118-7. Machine User Parameter (Spindle) .............................................................................. 2128-8. Machine System Parameter (Spindle) .......................................................................... 2138-9. Machine System Parameter (Door Interlock) ............................................................... 2148-10.Machine System Parameter (Milling Spindle).............................................................. 215

SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEX-ING.......................................................................................................216

1. Overview.............................................................................................................................. 216

2. Function ............................................................................................................................... 2172-1. Tool Management......................................................................................................... 2172-2. Turret Rotation.............................................................................................................. 2182-3. Edge Index Command.................................................................................................. 2192-4. Interlock ........................................................................................................................ 219

3. Tool Data Setting Screen..................................................................................................... 2203-1. TOOL SHAPE Screen .................................................................................................. 2203-2. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Screen (for the Machine with Tool Life Manage-

ment FUnction) ............................................................................................................. 2213-3. GROUP TABLE Screen (for the Machine with Tool Life Management Func-

tion)............................................................................................................................... 223

5262-E P-(vi)TABLE OF CONTENTS

4. System Variable................................................................................................................... 2244-1. Internal Tool Number.................................................................................................... 2244-2. System Variable for Internal Tool Number ................................................................... 2254-3. System Variable for Tool Group ................................................................................... 2264-4. System Variable for Turret Number.............................................................................. 2264-5. System Variables with No Subscript............................................................................. 226

SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400) ..............................................227

1. Operation ............................................................................................................................. 2281-1. Setup Operation ........................................................................................................... 2281-2. Ordinary Operation ....................................................................................................... 228

2. Tailstock Movement............................................................................................................. 2292-1. Manual Tailstock Movement ......................................................................................... 2292-2. Automatic Tailstock Movement..................................................................................... 229

3. Switching between High/Low Pressure ............................................................................... 2303-1. Switching between High/Low Pressure Command....................................................... 2303-2. Operation...................................................................................................................... 230

4. Multiple Sizing Position Command ...................................................................................... 2314-1. Multiple Sizing Position Command ............................................................................... 2314-2. Operation...................................................................................................................... 2314-3. Sequence Restoration (operation starting from the halfway of the program) ............... 231

5. Preparatory Operation ......................................................................................................... 2325-1. Setting the Sizing Position............................................................................................ 2325-2. No-load Torque Measurement...................................................................................... 233

6. Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 2346-1. NC Tailstock User Parameter ....................................................................................... 2346-2. NC Tailstock System Parameter .................................................................................. 238

7. Interlock ............................................................................................................................... 240

SECTION 7 OTHER FUNCTIONS...........................................................................243

1. Description of Other Functions ............................................................................................ 2431-1. Override for Internal Arc Cutting................................................................................... 2431-2. Helical Cutting Function (Optional) ............................................................................... 245

SECTION 8 APPENDIX...........................................................................................246

1. Logic Tables ........................................................................................................................ 246

2. ATC Input/Output Bit Tables................................................................................................ 269

3. List of Data Formats ............................................................................................................ 2833-1. Tool data setting (T) ..................................................................................................... 2833-2. Zero point data setting (0) ............................................................................................ 2843-3. Parameter setting (P) ................................................................................................... 285

5262-E P-(i)CONTENTS

CONTENTS

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEX-ING

SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

SECTION 7 OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION 8 APPENDIX

5262-E P-1SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

SECTION 1 TURRET OPERATION

1. OverviewThis section describes the functions and operations of the turrets installed in MACTURN and MUL-TUS series.MACTURN and MULTUS series can move its saddle in three directions X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis.The turret rotates around the Y-axis.The turret indexing function is available in two modes: “B-axis 1° indexing” by 1°, and “B-axis 1/1000° indexing” by 0.001°. However, only “B-axis 1/1000° indexing” is available in MULTUS series.

B-axis indexing type1° indexing 1/1000° indexing

MACTURN 250/350/550 Available AvailableMULTUS B300/B400 Not available Available


2. Turret Indexing ControlSince the turret of MACTURN and MULTUS series rotates around the Y-axis, a single tool can beused on the front or on a side according to the direction the turret is indexed.

2-1. Turret Index Position

(1) Base cutting positionOne of the basic indexing operations of the turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machinesis “base cutting position” indexing. The base cutting position means the state the tool attachedfaces the Z-axis direction. When a second spindle is equipped, the turret indexing position is180 degrees shifted from the base cutting position.

(2) Vertical cutting positionThe “vertical cutting position” is the state the B-axis is shifted 90 degrees from the base cuttingposition in the positive direction. In this position, the tool attached faces the X-axis direction.

(3) ATC positionMACTURN and MULTUS series are generally equipped with an ATC. To mount a tool to the tur-ret using an ATC, the saddle must be moved to the position where the tool can be replaced, andthe turret must be indexed to the ATC position in advance. On MACTURN and MULTUS seriesmachines, the ATC position and the turret indexing angle to the base cutting position are thesame.Although physical turret indexing is the same, the control mode may be different.

• H1 turret

LE32114R0400300030001

First spindle base cutting position

Second spindle base cutting position

Vertical cutting position


2-2. Turret Number Assignment

A general turret, for example an octagonal turret, is indexed with index numbers 1 to 8. The turret forMACTURN and MULTUS series machines, on the other hand, can use a single tool in two differentindexing positions, which means both the H1 turrets are internally controlled as square turrets in theNC.With a regular turret indexing command (such as T0100 and T0300), the turret number NC hasinternally assigned will be indexed to the base cutting position.

H1 turret numbersAlthough only one tool can be attached to the H1 turret, turret numbers 1 to 3 are assigned to it. Theturret can, therefore, be indexed as shown below with a T command, but to which direction the toolwill be faced will generally be directed.

LE32114R0400300040001

T2T1 T3


2-3. Turret Indexing Turret Control

The H1 turret cannot make a full turn because of the structure of the turret, and moves like a turretwithin a specific range as shown below.In a machine with a turret indexing single-direction positioning function (*) for turret control, an errorwill occur if an overshoot in a single direction is in the turret indexing prohibition range.

H1 turretThe MACTURN series can rotate the H1 turret between -15° and +195° and MULTUS seriesmachine can rotate between -30° and +195° with the base cutting position set at 0°.It will be indexed in the order of T1 → T2 → T3 → T2 → T1 → T2... with the manual turret swing but-ton.

LE32114R0400300050001

LE32114R0400300050002

* Such a machine positions the B-axis from the B-axis negative direction to the positive direction, irrespective of the position of the target point. With a command of positioning to a smaller angle than the current one, the B-axis will move to -10 degrees and then in the positive direction to the target point.


3. Turret B-axis Positioning ControlWhen “B-axis one-degree indexing mode” or “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing mode” isselected, the B-axis can be positioned to any set angle. This B-axis positioning control function isavailable for machining inclined faces.

3-1. B-axis Positioning

The B-axis can be positioned with only an MDI command or program command. To perform manualoperation with the B-axis positioned, the B-axis must be positioned in advance by MDI operation.For specific B-axis positioning commands, see 5. “Turret B-axis Positioning Commands”.

3-2. Movable Range of the B-axis

In B-axis positioning, the angular reference for the B-axis angle command is different depending onthe turret Indexed state. Basically, the increment in the B-axis angle from the turret indexing positionas the reference is directed.Depending on the turret indexing position, an error will occur if he B-axis positioning angle is out ofthe movable range.Set the movable range with the mechanical system parameters “turret boundary angle” and “turretangle range.”

H1 turretAssuming that the indexed angle of the B-axis with T1 as the base cutting position is 0.000°, the B-axis positioning command range for MACTURN series is between -30° and +195° and MULTUSseries is -30° and +195°.

LE32114R0400300080001

LE32114R0400300080002


3-3. Precautions for B-axis positioning control

(1) The B-axis positioning data just after software installation is 0 degrees.

(2) Issue a B-axis angle data command in the “BA=” format.

(3) A B-axis positioning command must be set in the same block as a turret indexing command.

(4) “BA = 0” will be considered directed when only a turret indexing command is issued.

(5) After the operation mode is switched from automatic or MFI operation to manual operation, theangle data for the B-axis positioning command remains valid. The B-axis angle data is backedup in real time and will be retained even after the power is turned OFF.

(6) The B-axis positioning angle data is displayed as current position data. However, if there is adifference of more than 0.5 degrees between the directed B-axis position and the angle of theB-axis actually positioned, the current position will be displayed as “ . ” In this case, thecurrent position will be displayed in the normal manner by swinging the turret again.

(7) The direction of the B-axis coordinates generally depends on the direction of the Y-axis coordi-nates. MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, however, always treat the counterclockwisedirection as the B-axis positive direction. This direction will not be affected by Y-axis mirrorimages that will be described later. On machines equipped with a sub-spindle, the clockwisedirection viewed from the turret is the B-axis positive direction when the coordinate system forthe second spindle mode is selected.


4. Turret Indexing CommandsA wide variety of directing methods are available for turret indexing according to the purpose.First understand the outline of the command systems, and see details of the directing methods.

4-1. Command Systems

rr: Nose R compensation numbertt: Tool numberoo: Tool compensation numbernn: Turret number

4-2. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers

TL = r r t t oo BT = 0TL = t t tooo BT = 0Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position.

• Commands for BT = 0 can be omitted.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ttt] and a tool compensationnumber in [ooo]. The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as thenose R compensation number.

4-3. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Numbers

TL = r r t t oo BT = 1TL = t t tooo BT = 1Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the number specified in [ttt] to the vertical cutting position.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ttt] and a tool compensationnumber in [ooo]. The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as thenose R compensation number.

Com-mand Purpose

Base cutting position indexing

RemarksVertical cutting

position indexing

TL Directing turret indexing with the tool number as an argument.

TL=rr t t oo BT=0The BT command must exist in the same block as the TL or TG command.

TL=rr t t oo BT=1

TG Directing turret indexing with the tool group number as an argument.

TG=gg BT=0TG=gg BT=1

T Directing turret indexing with the tur-ret number as an argument.

Trr t t oo TP=0 The TP command must exist in the same block as the T command.Trr t t oo TP=1

TCIndexing the turret to the ATC posi-tion with the turret number as an argument.

TC=nn


4-4. Base cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers

TG = gg BT = 0TG = ggg BT = 0 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the tool group number specified in [gg] to the base cutting posi-tion.


• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool group number in [ggg].

• Specify an offset group with OG = [1/2/3].

• The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensa-tion number.

4-5. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Tool Group Numbers

TG = gg BT = 1TG = ggg BT = 1 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the tool group number specified in [gg] to the vertical cutting posi-tion.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool group number in [ggg].



4-6. Base cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers

T r r n n oo TP = 0T n n ooo TP = 0 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the turret of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position andbegins cutting with the tool attached in the base cutting position.

• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool compensation number in [ooo]. The samenumber as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensation number.

[Supplement]

Although TP = 0 can be omitted, a simple turret indexing command will be set in this case. T2 canbe directed.


4-7. Vertical Cutting Position Indexing by Turret Numbers

T r r n n oo TP =1T n n ooo TP = 1

This command indexes the turret of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position andbegins cutting with the tool attached in the vertical cutting position.


4-8. ATC Position Indexing by Turret Numbers

TC = 1 H1 turret

This command indexes the turret of the number specified to the ATC position.

4-9. Independent Direction of the Tool Compensation Number, the Nose R Compensation Number, and the Tool Diameter Compensa-tion Number

In general, the tool compensation number, nose R compensation number or tool diameter compen-sation number is specified by setting the compensation number together with a turret indexing com-mand. However, by using this function, these compensation numbers can independently be setwithout using a turret indexing command.

[Command format] OF = oo OF = ooo Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command can change the currently valid tool compensation number or nose R compensationnumber.

• An error will occur if the OF command is set in the same block as the T, TL, and OG commands.

• The compensation number with the OF command will be valid for all of the tool offset number,the nose R compensation number, and the tool diameter compensation number.


5. Turret B-axis Positioning CommandsA wide variety of directing methods are available for turret positioning according to the purposewhen the B-axis one-degree indexing function or B-axis 1/1000-degree indexing function isselected.First understand the outline of the command systems, and see details of the directing methods.

5-1. Command Systems

rr: Nose R compensation numbertt: Tool numberoo: Tool compensation numberangle: B-axis positioning angle directed valueG52: Edge offset calculated value at B-axis positioning

Command Purpose

Positioning from base cutting position

RemarksPositioning from

vertical cutting position

TL

Performing posi-tioning simulta-neously with the TL command.

TL=rr t t oo BT=0 BA=[angle] G52

TL=rr t t oo BT=1 BA=[angle] G52

TG

Performing posi-tioning simulta-neously with the TG command.

TG=gg BT=0 BA=[angle] G52

TG=gg BT=1 BA=[angle] G52

T

Performing posi-tioning simulta-neously with the T command.

Trr t t oo TP=0 BA=[angle] G52

Trr t t oo TP=1 BA=[angle] G52

Indepen-dent

Independently performing posi-tioning.

BA=[angle] G52

Available for only the H1 turret.Angle from the base cutting position.


5-2. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TL Com-mand

TL = r r t t oo BT = [0/1] BA = [angle] G52TL = t t t ooo BT = [0/1] BA = [angle] G52 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the number specified in [tt] to the cutting position specified withBT and relatively positions it to the position equal to the angle data specified with BA from the index-ing position.


• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ttt] and a tool compensationnumber in [ooo].The same number as the tool compensation number will be selected as the nose R compensa-tion number.

• The minimum setting unit of BA depends on the indexing function.Minimum command unit = 1 degree B-axis one-degree pitch indexing functionMinimum command unit = 0.001 degree B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function

5-3. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the TG Com-mand

TG = gg BT = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52TL = ggg BT = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the tool of the tool group number specified in [tt] to the cutting position spec-ified with BT and relatively positions it to the position equal to the angle data specified with BA fromthe indexing position.


• With regard to 200 tool life control sets, specify a tool number in [ggg].



• The minimum setting unit of BA depends on the indexing function.Minimum command unit = 1 degree B-axis one-degree pitch indexing functionMinimum command unit = 0.001 degree B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function


5-4. B-axis Positioning Command in the Same Block as the T Com-mand

T r r n n oo TP = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52T n n ooo TP = [1/0] BA = [angle] G52 Number of tool life control sets: 200

This command indexes the turret of the number specified in [tt] to the base cutting position and rela-tively positions it to the position equal to the angle data specified with BA from the indexing position.


[Supplement]

5-5. Independent Command for Positioning B-axis

The BA command can independently be directed.In this case, however, the same positioning as that with the following command will internally takeplace. The tool offset, nose radius compensation, and tool diameter compensation numbers will beall cleared, and they must be reset when they need to be reset.

LE32114R0400300250001

Although TP = 0 can be omitted, a simple turret indexing command will be set in this case, andpositioning with the BA command will be performed from the base cutting position.


5-6. Turret Rotary Position Offset Command in B-axis Positioning (G52)

When performing machining by issuing the BA command after locating the turret in a specified posi-tion, regular tool offset is no more effective. The tool edge position must be offset by dividing theedge position into the X direction component and the Z direction component using the turret rotationaxis as the center.The T, TL, and OG commands are used to index the turret, but they do not perform tool offset whenthe B-axis is located in cutting position. To calculate the edge position when the BA command isexecuted, execute the G52 command. By doing this, the edge position will be internally calculatedusing various parameters such as turret center offset, edge position offset, turret number, and tooloffset, allowing you to set correct offset positions.

LE32114R0400300260001


5-7. Terms Relevant to Turret Rotary Position Compensation

Positions indicated by the terms relevant to turret rotary position compensation

LE32114R0400300270001

LE32114R0400300270002

(1) Okuma reference pointThe offset reference point is factory-set at the point where the motor rotary axis intersects withthe motor end face when the B-axis angle is set to 0°.

(2) Turret center offsetThe positional relation between the Okuma reference point and the turret rotation center can beset. Normally, this offset is already set before a machine is shipped. This value affects the cal-culation of the turret rotary position offset command.

(3) Edge position offsetThe offset from the Okuma reference point to the user reference point set by a user can be set.


6. Manual Turret Indexing OperationAlthough the turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines is the H1 turret in appearance, it isinternally controlled so that 90-degree indexing is possible. For turrets that are not designed to con-tinuously swing due to the structure of the turret, turret control is performed instead.

6-1. Turret Indexing Position

There are three turret indexing positions: the base cutting position, the vertical cutting position, andthe ATC position.On MACTURN and MULTUS series machines, the base cutting position and the ATC position areidentical, but because the purpose of operation is different between them, for which purpose index-ing will be performed must be selected with “turret indexing” on the ATC operation panel.

6-2. H1 Turret

The H1 turret cannot continuously swing. For this reason, the order of indexing to the cutting posi-tion is as shown below. Additionally, since only one tool can be attached to the turret, the turret doesnot operate even if the turret swing button is pressed after the tool has been indexed to the ATCposition as long as “ATC position” indexing is selected.

6-2-1. Indexing the turret to the cutting position

The turret is indexed in the order shown below. However, when the B-axis positioning command (BAcommand) is set, the axis will be positioned to the position offset by the angle.

LE32114R0400300310001

6-2-2. Indexing the turret to the ATC position

T1 is indexed directly to the ATC position, irrespective of the indexed state of the turret. However, byclicking the turret button in the state of T3, the turret suspends swinging in the state of T2. Holdingdown the button indexes the turret directly to the ATC position.

6-2-3. Turret swing conditions

• Either the X-axis or Z-axis is positioned on the positive variable limit.

• On a machine equipped with a sub-spindle, the X-axis is positioned on the positive variablelimit.

• The saddle is positioned in the ATC tool replacement position.

The turret can swing when any one of the above conditions is met.


7. Manual B-axis Positioning OperationWhen the “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing” function or “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing” func-tion is selected, the turret swing can be not only positioned but also positioned as the B-axis. Thissection describes B-axis positioning.Since only the difference between one-degree pitch indexing function and 1/1000-degree pitchindexing is the minimum command unit, note that only the command values must be replaced withthe appropriate ones when reading the text.

7-1. Positioning the B-axis

The B-axis cannot be positioned in manual operation. To position it in a specific position, executedthe BA command in advance in MDI operation mode or automatic operation mode. Once the BAcommand has been executed, it remains valid until the next command is executed. It will be keptstored even if the machine is reset or the power is turned OFF.The issued BA command pairs up with a turret number. To index the turret for which the BA com-mand has been executed when the turret swing button is pressed in manual operation mode, theturret will be positioned to the position the BA command is reflected.B-axis positioning described above cannot be performed until “cutting position” is selected for turretindexing on the ATC operation panel.

7-2. Canceling B-axis positioning

To cancel B-axis positioning in manual turret indexing, index the turret to the base cutting position orvertical cutting position in MDI operation mode or automatic operation mode. When no BA com-mand is attached, [BA = 0] is considered in the NC directed and the B-axis angle data is deemedcleared.


7-3. BA Angle Data Display

The BA data after B-axis positioning will be displayed as [BA] of the current position. When the B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function is used, decimals are not displayed. If there is a differencebetween the BA command and the actual B-axis positioning angle, **** (asterisks) will be displayed.

LE32114R0400300370001


8. Manual Slant Feed FunctionIt is possible to feed the saddle in slanted directions (X-axis - Z-axis contouring) by manual pulsehandle feed or JOG feed.

8-1. Designating a Slant Feed Direction

Set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” on the PARAMETER/B-AXIS USER PARAMETER screen the angleat which manual slant feed will be performed

Procedure :

1 Select parameter setting mode.

2 Using [DISPLAY CHANGE], [ITEM], etc., have the “B-AXIS USER PARAMETER” screen dis-played.

3 Move the cursor to “SLANT FEED ANGLE,” and set specific angle data.

LE32114R0400300390001


For control, set to what degrees the coordinate system formed by Z-X will be rotated around the Y-axis.The axis selection key (X/Z) for manual operation mode can select the axis to the coordinate systemafter rotation.

LE32114R0400300390002

8-2. Selecting Slant Feed, Feed Operation

To perform slant feed by manual operation, the “SLANT FEED” key on the auxiliary operation panelto select slant feed mode. During slant feed selection, the LED on the panel remains lit.During slant feed selection, the X-axis feed key and the Z-axis feed key are available, or pulse handX-axis/Y-axis selection becomes valid for the X’-axis and the Z’-axis. Other operations relating to theY-axis and the C-axis are the same as the regular operations.

[Supplement]

(1) Manual slant feed speed, slant feed distanceManual slant feed using the JOG keys is performed at the X-axis or Z-axis manual feed unit rateset in the axis data file, whichever is slower. The manual feed acceleration unit rate increases ordecreases with the manual feed acceleration unit rate for the axis whose manual feed unit ratehas been adopted.The feed distance in pulse handle feed is the travel distance in the manual slant feed directiondesignated by the pulse handle.During slant feed selection, the Y-axis command is a radius value command as Y-axis controlmode is selected.

(2) Control when the axis has reached the variable limitThe X-axis or Z-axis setting position is valid as the variable limit even during manual slant feedselection. When either the X-axis or Z-axis, which is in manual slant feed in the X’-axis or Z’-axis, has reached the variable limit, all axis feed operations will stop, and the X’-axis or Z’-axiswill not move in the direction beyond the variable limit.

• If two or more of the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis JOG keys on the operation panel arepressed at the same time when the “SLANT FEED” LED is lit, none of all of the feed axes willmove.

• Slant feed can be selected only in “manual operation mode or manual intervention mode” and“Y-axis control mode.”

Z'

Z

X

Slant feed rotation angle


8-3. Caution on Recovering from Manual Intervention

[Supplement]

8-4. Relationship with the Slant Compound Fixed Cycle Function

The slant angle command value, which is issued simultaneously with the slant machining mode ONcommand (G127), is automatically set in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” on the B-AXIS USER PARAME-TER screen. Before manually using the slant feed function, confirm that the feed angle set in“SLANT FEED ANGLE” is the appropriate value.

8-5. Others

Since the turret B-axis positioning angle and the coordinate conversion angle around the Y-axisspecified in “SLANT FEED ANGLE” are independently handled, pay attention to both angle datawhen drilling a slant face.

If slant feed is performed and the SEQUENCE RETURN key is pressed during manual interven-tion, the X-axis and the Y-axis independently travel to the sequence restart position and will notlinearly move back in the slant feed direction. Each axis returns at the manual feed speed. Beforepressing the SEQUENCE RESTART key, move the axes closer to the return position in advanceto minimize the axis travel distance to return.


9. Tool Index FunctionThe H1 turret for MACTURN and MULTUS series machines has the same attachment structure forboth cutting tools and rotary tools. The edge of even a cutting tool can be set at any desired angle bymeans of an M-axis indexing function. Making effective use of this structure and turning the edge180 degrees make it possible to use tool for other purposes. The tool index function is intended toindex a tool and select its data.

9-1. Relation between Turret Indexing and Tool Indexing

LE32114R0400300450001

9-2. Relation between Tool Indexing and Graphic Display

The tool index function changes the graphic display based on the preset tool shape data each timethe tool direction is changed 180°. If you set the tool shape data with its angle set at 0°, the graphic display changes when the tool isindexed.

First spindle base position

Position A

First spindle base positionPosition B

First spindle vertical position A

First spindle vertical position B

Second spindle base position

Position A

Second spindle base positionPosition B

Second spindle vertical position B

Second spindle vertical position A


9-3. Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation

When a tool index command is specified, the graphic display of the tool shape changes automati-cally. However, the tool compensation data is not changed. It is, therefore, necessary to specify thetool compensation data again after indexing the tool.Description below is the mechanism of a machine equipped with a “tool compensation multi-systemfunction.”A machine equipped with a tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation datatable for each of the base position, the vertical position and positions A/B (a machine having a sub-spindle has eight data tables in all). Upon execution of a tool index command, the tool offset, nose Rcompensation, and nose R compensation direction numbers switch to those shown in the oppositeposition table. That is, each compensation number remains unchanged, but the compensation val-ues specified by these compensation numbers are changed as the table itself is changed.

LE32114R0400300470001

For example, when the dot-meshed compensation of No. 2 is selected in position A, the compensa-tion switches to No. 2 in the table under Position B upon execution of tool indexing. Since the tablesare independent, the compensation values are different between them.

9-4. Tool Index Commands

(1) M codesThe following M codes are used to index an M-tool spindle: M602: Command for indexing the M-tool spindle at 0° position and clamping it. M603: Command for indexing the M-tool spindle at 180° position and clamping it.

9-5. Relation between Rotary Tool and Tool Index Commands

The tool index command can be specified even if a rotary tool is mounted.Since the rotary tool can be used for turning as well as milling, it is necessary to specify the toolindex command according to the purpose of use.As described in 9-3. “Relation between Tool Index Command and Tool Compensation”, if the tool off-set multi-system is provided, the tool offset table changes upon designation of a tool index com-mand even when using a rotary tool for milling.Set the tool offset data used only for milling in position A, and after specifying the tool index com-mand, return the tool to position A before performing milling.

Position ATool offset

Nose R compensation

Nose R direction

Position BNo.1 No.1No.2 No.2No.3 No.3 :No.1 No.1No.2 No.2No.3 No.3 :No.1 No.1No.2 No.2No.3 No.3 :

:

:

:


10. Parameter Settings

10-1. B-axis User Parameters

(1) Slant feed angleThis parameter sets the Z-X coordinate turning angle in manual slant feed of the saddle.

(2) Tool edge offsetThis parameter sets the offset from the Okuma reference point to the user reference point setby a user. When the edge offset is changed, the tool offset must be reset.

10-2. B-axis System Parameters

(1) Turret center offsetThe positional relation between the Okuma reference point and the turret rotation center can beset. Normally, this offset is already set before a machine is shipped.

10-3. Turret Position Error Compensation

Turret position error compensation in the reference cutting position is the same as general turretposition error compensation. However, turret position error compensation in the vertical cutting posi-tion becomes valid only when the “B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function” and the “B-axis 1/1000-degree pitch indexing function” are not provided.The turret compensation number is selected based on only the turret number. For example, thecompensation value for “turret No. 2 in the vertical cutting position” is used for the turret positionerror compensation value for machining with the tool attached to turret No. 1 in the vertical cuttingposition.

10-4. B-axis Indexing Angles

This parameter is displayed only when the B-axis one-degree pitch indexing function is selected.Set the indexing position of each B-axis corresponding to the B-axis positioning command.

Setting unit : 1°Setting range : -359.999° to 359.999°Initial value : 0.000°

Setting unit : 1 mmSetting range : -9999.999 to 9999.999Initial value : 0.000

Setting unit : 1 mmSetting range : -9999.999 to 9999.999Initial value : 0.000

Setting unit : 1 mmSetting range : -9999.999 - 9999.999Initial value : 0.000

Setting unit : 0.001 degreesSetting range : 0.000 degrees - 359.000 degreesInitial value : Set for each point according to the following rule:

Initial value = (Point number - 1) x 1.000 degree


10-5. M-axis Orientation

This parameter becomes valid only when the M-axis fixed position stop function and the B-axis con-trol function are selected. Set M-axis orientation when the M-axis is indexed to the base cutting posi-tion, and that when it is indexed to the ATC position for each turret number.

10-6. System Parameters

When the machine is equipped with an H1 turret and an inductosyn detection function or pitch errorcompensation function, the following “origin offset” parameter will be added to the system parameterT-axis. Detector offset, backlash, in-position, detector, and connection compensation are the sameas the regular parameters.

(1) Origin offsetThis parameter is used to compensate for the detector offset when it is not 0.000 degrees dueto Inductosyn connection or for some other reason although the offset was set so that themechanical coordinates would be 0.000 degrees by indexing turret No. 1 to the base cuttingposition.

Setting unit : 1 degreeSetting range : 0.000 - 359.999Initial value : 0.000

Setting unit : 1 degreeSetting range : -0.999 - +0.999Initial value : 0.000


10-7. Optional Parameters

This parameter becomes valid when the tool compensation multi-system function is selected.

(1) Vertical position command SPThis parameter enables a machine with the tool compensation multi-system function to switchthe tool compensation table to be used according to the turret indexing state (for base positionand vertical position).On a machine equipped with a B-axis positioning function, the physical state of the turret is thesame when base cutting position indexing BA = 90 is executed and when vertical positionindexing is performed. However, the tool compensation data of the table for the base position isused for the former, and that of the table for the vertical position for the latter. With this parame-ter, whether base position or vertical position tool compensation will be used when base cuttingposition indexing BA = 90 is executed can be selected.

(2) Tool offset automatic calculationA machine with the tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation table foreach system. However, it uses the same tools in principle, and it is, therefore, possible toroughly calculate the tool offset data on the other tools by internal operation if the tool offsetdata on any one of the tools is obtained.This automatic calculation function becomes valid at tool offset measurement with a touch sen-sor. Automatic calculation will not be performed in manually setting, adding or calculating thetool offset. With this parameter, whether the data on other systems will be automatically calcu-lated can be selected.

10-8. Machine System Parameters

This parameter sets the turret index prohibition area in turret index control.The turret index prohibition area is specified with the angle position of the boundary the turret mustnot enter and the angle width of the prohibition area. To disable turret index control, set “0.000” inthe field of “Turret index prohibition width.”

(1) Turret index boundary angleSet the negative side angle of the prohibition area.

(2) Turret index prohibition widthSet the angle width that defines the boundary the turret must not enter.

INVALID : The base position tool compensation data will be used.EFFECT : The vertical position tool compensation data will be used.Initial value : INVALID

INVALID : Automatic calculation will not be performed.EFFECT : Automatic calculation will be performed.Initial value : EFFECT




11. Tool Data Setting

11-1. Tool Shape Data

The TOOL SHAPE screen displayed in tool data setting mode is used to set the graphic data on thetools to be used for machining simulation. The B-axis control turret is indexed to the base cuttingposition and the vertical cutting position and thereby ensures machining in two ways. The tool shapedata is set for the base cutting position and for the vertical cutting position, and the data is switchedaccording to the command.

(1) Setting the tool shape dataFor how to set tool shape data, see the operation manual as the procedure is the same as thestandard setting.To display the base cutting position tool shape screen or vertical cutting position tool shapescreen, press the function key [F4] (CUTTING POSITION). Each time the function key ispressed, [BASE] and [VERTICAL] are switched alternately.

LE32114R0400300580001


11-2. Tool Compensation

This section describes the basic concept of tool compensation on MACTURN and MULTUS seriesmachines.As shown in the figures below, the table of tool offset, nose R compensation, and nose R direction iscommon to base cutting position and vertical cutting position indexing. For this reason, the sametool compensation number cannot be used for base cutting position indexing and vertical cuttingposition indexing.Although “base position” and “vertical position” tool shape codes are available for graphic drawing,tool shape data is shared.

When a spindle is used

LE32114R0400300590001

When two spindles are used

LE32114R0400300590002

Base position Vertical positionCutting position

Table

Tool offsetNose R compensationNose R direction

Shape code (type, shape No., classification)

Shape data (edge angle, cutter angle, etc.)

Cutting position First spindlebase position

First spindlevertical position

Second spindlevertical position

Second spindlebase positionTable

Tool offsetNose R compensationNose R direction


Shape data (edge angle, cutter angle, etc.)


11-3. Tool Life Management (Special Function)

The OG command issued by the tool life management function is to specify which number of toolcompensation value in the tool compensation group set for the tool in tool data setting mode to use.Some tools attached to the H1 turret machines perform cutting in both the base cutting position andthe vertical cutting position, but the same tool compensation number cannot be used for two cuttingpositions because the edge positions are different. The tool group number and offset group numberfor tool life management can, therefore, be used for the “base position” and the “vertical position”respectively. A tool information table for tool life management is available for each cutting position,and three sets of offset group numbers can be selected as in general tool life management.

LE32114R0400300600001

Press the function key [F4] (CUTTING POSITION) on the second page of functions to switch thetool life management table for the base cutting position or vertical cutting position.


12. Tool Compensation Multi-System FunctionA table containing general information about tools (compensation data, shape data) is preparedbase on the turret. So, the same offset number cannot be used when tools having two or more coor-dinate systems, such as sub-spindles, are used or when the same tool is used for different indexingoperations like MACTURN and MULTUS series machines.The tool compensation multi-system function divides the purposes of use of tools in a systematicmanner and makes independent offset numbers available for each system.

12-1. Combinations of Compensation Systems

The following are the functions that are available for system combinations according to the purposesof use of tools:

• H1 turret function

• Tool compensation multi-system function

• Tool index function

This manual describes the sub-spindle model because it covers all the machine models. In the case of single spindle model, regard it as the machine equipped only with the first spindle.

<Combination of permissible selections>

Combination OK OK OK OK N/A OK N/A OKH1 turret Unselect Select Unselect Select Unselect Select Unselect SelectTool compensation multi-system Unselect Unselect Select Select Unselect Unselect Select Select

Tool index Unselect Unselect Unselect Unselect Select Select Select SelectCompensation data structure 1 2 - 3 - 4


12-2. Tool Compensation Data Structure

In the following table, the dot-shaded fields show a table. For example, if the dot-shaded field on theline of tool offset, nose R compensation, and nose R direction is across the columns of first spindlebase position, first spindle vertical position, second spindle vertical position, and second spindlebase position, the tool compensation table is shared by the systems. Divided dot-shaded fields onthe same line indicate that different tables are used for the systems.

Compensation data structure 1

LE32114R0400300630001


LE32114R0400300630002

TableTool offsetNose R compensationNose R direction


Shape data (edge angle, cutter angle, et.)

Tool group No.Offset group No.

System First spindlebase position



Second spindlebase position





System First spindlebase position



Second spindlebase position



LE32114R0400300630003


LE32114R0400300630004

“Position A” and “Position B” in the tables above are position A and position B of the tool index func-tion.“A/B automatic switching” in the tables means that the shape code automatically changes whenposition A or position B is switched to the other by tool indexing.

* By selecting the tool compensation multi-system control function, the handling of the tool group and offset group greatly varies between tool compensation (tool offset, nose R compensation, nose R direction) and tool life management. An independent compensation table for tool com-pensation is provided for each system, whereas the information tables for tool life management are common to the systems.However, the tool compensation data indirectly connected by an offset group is independently available for each system, and it does not actually cause any problem in common information tables.

A/B automaticswitching







System First spindle base position First spindle vertical position Second spindle vertical position Second spindle base position

Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B








System First spindle base position

Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B Position A Position B

First spindle vertical position Second spindle vertical position Second spindle base position


12-3. Selecting the TOOL COMPENSATION Screen with the Tool Com-pensation Multi-system Function

The system displayed on the TOOL OFFSET/NOSE R COMPENSATION screen in tool data settingmode can be switched by pressing the function key [F3] (CUTTING POSITION) on the second pageof functions.

• Without the tool index function

LE32114R0400300640001

• With the tool index function

LE32114R0400300640002

12-4. Tool Life Management Tool Information Screen for the Tool Com-pensation Multi-system Function

There are three tool life management information screens: A (number of workpieces machined), B (machining time), and C (wear amount). Each information screen is common to all systems.

* On a machine equipped with a sub-spindle, the first spindle or second spindle is switched to the other by pressing the spindle selector button on the additional operation panel.

Base position Vertical position Base position

Base position/position A Base position/position B Vertical position/position A

Vertical position/position B Base position/position A


12-5. System Variables

When the tool compensation multi-system function is selected, it means that there are two or moretool compensation tables. Up to eight tool compensation tables exist, including machines equippedwith a sub-spindle and the tool index function. System variables are available for each system torefer to or set compensation data for each system from the program.

Tool offset

*=X, Z, Y

Nose R compensation

System variable Subscript type DescriptionVTF*A [subscript type]

1 - 321 - 961 - 200

First spindle base position/position A tool offsetVTF*B [subscript type] First spindle vertical position/position A tool offsetVTF*C [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position A tool offsetVTF*D [subscript type] Second spindle vertical position/position A tool offsetVTF*E [subscript type] First spindle base position/position B tool offsetVTF*F [subscript type] First spindle base position/position B tool offsetVTF*G [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position B tool offsetVTF*H [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position B tool offsetVTOF* [subscript type] Tool offset in currently selected position

System variable Subscript type Description

VNR*A [subscript type]

1 - 321 - 961 - 200

First spindle base position/position A nose R compen-sation

VNR*B [subscript type] First spindle vertical position/position A nose R com-pensation

VNR*C [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position A nose R com-pensation

VNR*D [subscript type] Second spindle vertical position/position A nose R compensation

VNR*E [subscript type] First spindle base position/position B nose R compen-sation

VNR*F [subscript type] First spindle base position/position B nose R compen-sation

VNR*G [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position B nose R com-pensation

VNR*H [subscript type] Second spindle base position/position B nose R com-pensation

VNSR* [subscript type] Nose R compensation currently selected position


13. Other Functions

13-1. Tool Compensation Automatic Calculation Function

A machine with the tool compensation multi-system function has a tool compensation table for eachsystem. However, it uses the same tools in principle, and it is, therefore, possible to roughly calcu-late the tool offset data on the other tools by internal operation if the tool offset data on any one ofthe tools is obtained.This automatic calculation function is applicable to the data on the tool number in the field (tool off-set or nose R compensation (including compensation direction)) in which the cursor is placed. Thetool compensation system currently selected is the basis for calculation.Pressing the function key [AUTO CAL] activates the automatic calculation function.

13-2. Turret Coolant Interlock

The turret coolant can be output only when the turret is performing cutting position indexing.When the turret is performing ATC position indexing or has not completed indexing, it will not be out-put even if the coolant operation switch on the operation panel is turned ON. Perform a coolantoperation after cutting position indexing has been completed.Additionally, the turret coolant will not be output as long as the shutter of the ATC is open.


13-3. Data Input/Output Function

The H1 turret machine switches base position indexing or vertical position indexing to the otheraccording to the purpose, and has a tool compensation table for each system. The tool compensa-tion data structure is different depending on whether the “tool compensation multi-system controlfunction” is selected. The following table summarizes the data structures. For the operation of thedata input/output function, see the “Operation Manual.”The data input/output procedure for turret B of a two-saddle machine is the same as general datainput/output. See the “Operation Manual.”

(1) When the tool compensation multi-system control function is selected

(2) When the tool compensation multi-system control function is not selected

Data type Identifier Description of dataTool offset T1 X (X-axis)

Z (Z-axis)Y (Y-axis)

Nose R compensation T2 X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Q (pattern number)

For B-axis control

• Tool offset group

• Tool classification

• Tool shape data

T19 <First spindle base position>A (tool offset group 1)B (tool offset group 2)C (tool offset group 3)D (tool classification code)E (tool shape code)<First spindle vertical position>H (tool offset group 1)I (tool offset group 2)J (tool offset group 3)K (tool classification code)L (tool shape code)<Second spindle base position>P (tool offset group 1)Q (tool offset group 2)R (tool offset group 3)S (tool classification code)T (tool shape code)<Second spindle vertical position>U (tool offset group 1)V (tool offset group 2)W (tool offset group 3)

Data type Identifier Description of dataTool offset T1 <First spindle base position/position A>

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (Y-axis)

Nose R compensation T2 <First spindle base position/position A>X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Q (pattern number)


<First spindle base position/position B>

• Tool offset

• Nose R compensa-tion

T20 X (X-axis tool offset)Z (Z-axis tool offset)Y (Y-axis tool offset)I (X-axis nose R compensation)K (Z-axis nose R compensation)Q (pattern number)

<First spindle vertical position/position A>

• Tool offset



<First spindle vertical position/position B>

• Tool offset



<Second spindle base position/position A>

• Tool offset



<Second spindle base position/position B>

• Tool offset



<Second spindle verti-cal position/position A>

• Tool offset



<Second spindle verti-cal position/position B>

• Tool offset



For B-axis control

• Tool offset group

• Tool classification

• Tool shape data

T19 A (tool offset group 1)B (tool offset group 2)C (tool offset group 3)D (tool classification code)E (tool shape code)

Data type Identifier Description of data


13-4. Interlock

(1) Turret swing conditionsThe H1 turret can rotate when it is at only the “X-axis positive limit”.

(2) Tool rotation command interlock

a. M spindle interlock during M tool unclampingDuring M tool unclamping, the M spindle is subjected to the restriction of 60% of the ratedtorque and kept disabled from rotating, stopping at a fixed position, inching, and swinging(including synchronous taping and flat tapping).

The M-axis does not stop at a fixed position with a turret ATC position indexing command(however, the M-axis fixed position stop command from the ATC is valid).

5262-E P-38SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

SECTION 2 ATC OPERATION

1. OverviewThe ATC unit discussed here exchanges the tools in the turret with the tools stored in the magazine.The ATC provided in MACTURN and MULTUS is NC-controlled and rotates, advances, or retractsits tool change arm by the BL motor.

2. Machine Specifications

2-1. Outline of the Machine

2-1-1. Turret

MACTURN 30/50 has an H2 turret while MACTURN 250/350/550 and MULTUS-B300/B400 has anH1 turret to which an L or M tool can be mounted.For details of indexing, refer to SECTION 1 “TURRET OPERATION”.

LE32114R0400400020001

Fig.2-1 Turret (Viewed from the Machine Front)

Special (Optional) SpecificationsThis manual describes the specifications for the lathe having the ATC unit.Since these specifications are only for the users who selected such an option.For the specifications for each machine, refer to the final specification.

T 1

H1Turret

T 1

T 3

H2 Turret


2-1-2. Magazine

Magazine pots can store an L-tool, an M-tool, a DT tool (dummy tool) or a sensor. Concerning a sen-sor, note that only a sensor that can be handled by the ATC unit may be used.

• The magazine has two tool index positions. They are the ATC position where automatic toolchange is performed by the ATC, and the manual tool change position where a tool is manuallymounted to or removed from a magazine pot.

• When storing a super-large diameter tool in the magazine, the super-large diameter tool storingpot must be surrounded by empty pots. In other words, if a super-large diameter tool is stored inthe magazine, the adjacent pots cannot store a tool. The pots under such state are called a“dummy pot”.

LE32114R0400400030001

• Similarly, a dummy pot is secured for an R-large diameter tool and an L-large diameter tool.With an R-large diameter tool, the pot at the right side (magazine number “n-1”) of the pot (mag-azine number “n”) where an R-large diameter tool is stored is secured as a dummy pot. With anL-large diameter tool, the pot at the left side (magazine number “n+1”) of the pot (magazinenumber “n”) where an L-large diameter tool is stored is secured as a dummy pot.

• When a large diameter tool is stored in the magazine (pot number “n”), only a standard tool canbe stored in the adjacent pots (magazine pot number “n-1” and “n+1”). It is impossible to store asuper-large diameter tool in either pot, a left-large diameter tool in the right pot or a right largediameter tool in the left pot (MULTUS-B300/B400 only).

• When a large, super-large, right-large or left-large diameter tool is returned from the turret to themagazine, the tool is always returned to the pot where it was stored previously. The pot whereany of a super-large, an R-large and an L-large diameter tool is stored is recognized as the potfor which the tool to be returned is determined (the pot is called a “reserved pot”) when a tool isremoved from such a pot. Tools other than the previously stored tool are not returned to the potrecognized as the reserved pot.

Standard tool Super-large diameter tool

Dummy pot

Magazine Magazine MagazineNo."n-1" No."n" No."n+1"


2-1-3. Cutting Tools

Tool numbers from No.1 to No.95 can be used. (This number range is expanded to No.1 to No.200 ifthe function for managing 200 sets of tools is selected.) These numbers can be also used as the tooloffset number.The tool management data indicated below is set for the individual tools in the tool data settingmode. It is possible to change tool change arm operating speed when handling a heavy tool. In thetool data setting mode, set the heavy tool identification code. When the ATC handles the tool speci-fied as a heavy tool, tool change arm operating speed (rotation, advance and retraction) is changedto a lower speed.The NC ATC specification requires the following data to be set.

• Tool number

• Tool kind (L-tool, M-tool, DT-tool, sensor)

• Tool size / tool weight(Standard, R-large / Heavy, L-large / Heavy, Super-large / Heavy / Super large: Heavy / Large:Heavy)


2-2. Machine Operation

ATC Operation of MULTUS-B300/B400

LE32114R0400400050001

LE32114R0400400050002

Tool change arm EAin RS position

Tool change armin ATC position

Tool change arm EArotation (EC axis)

Ready station RSin tool change/MG position

Ready station toolinsert/extract

Magazine MGrotation

Tool change arm/M-tool spindle position interlock

Tool change arm EAmovement (EZ axis)

Tool change arm(Insert/Extract)

M-tool spindleIndexing

M-tool spindle lock pinclamp/unclamp

ATC shutteropen/close


2-3. ATC Operation

MULTUS-B300/B400

MACTURN250/350

S1 Waiting for next tool commandS2 Magazine (MG) indexingS3 Ready station (RS) tool extractionS4 RS change positionS5 RS tool extractionS6 RS MG positionS7 Waiting for machine cycle endS8 Tool change arm (EA) tool insertion/Shutter closeS9 EA Rotation (90°)S10 Turret Tool clampS11 EA tool extractionS12 EA Rotation (180°)S13 EA tool insertionS14 Turret Tool clampS15 EA Rotation 90°S16 EA RS position/Shutter closeS17 MG return pot indexing (EA)S18 RS change positionS19 RS tool insertionS20 RS MG positionS21 RS tool extraction

S1 Waiting for next tool commandS2 Magazine (MG) indexingS3 RS tool insertionS4 RS change positionS5 RS tool extraction/Shutter 2 closeS6 Waiting for the machine cycle endS7 Starting the MG return pot indexingS8 Shutter openS9 Tool change EA clamp

Turret Tool unclampEA tool extractionEA Rotation (180°)EA tool insertionTurret Tool clampEA retract position

S10 Shutter closeS11 MG return pot indexing (RS)S12 RS tool insertion/Shutter 2 close


MACTURN550

S13 RS MG positionS14 RS tool extraction

S1 Waiting for next tool commandS2 Magazine (MG) indexingS3 Sub-arm (SA) MG positionS4 SA Tool lockS5 SA tool extractionS6 SA RS positionS7 SA tool insertionS8 SA Tool unlockS9 SA retract positionS10 Waiting for the command (M06 command)S11 Starting the MG return pot indexing (Turret)S12 ATC Shutter close

Turret Tool unclamp low pressureS13 RS change positionS14 Shutter 2 closeS15 Shutter openS16 Tool change EA clamp

Turret Tool unclampEA tool extractionEA Rotation (180°)EA tool insertionTurret Tool clampEA retract position

S17 Shutter closeS18 Shutter 2 closeS19 RS MG positionS20 MG return pot indexing (RS)S21 SA RS positionS22 SA Tool lockS23 SA tool extractionS24 SA MG positionS25 SA tool insertionS26 SA Tool unlockS27 SA intermediate position


3. ATC Logic TablesSee Appendix for the ATC logic tables.

3-1. Input Logic Tables

The input logic tables indicate the input signal statuses of ATC units necessary for the completion ofindividual ATC sequences.

(1) Symbols

LE32114R0400400080001

(2) Status Input Items

a. The ON/OFF status of inputs No. 0120 to No. 0502 can be confirmed on the CHECK DATAATC INPUT screen (See also 8. “ATC Status Display”.).

b. Concerning the item of “T Tool change position”, the status input is assumed to be ON (sat-isfied) when the actual position is within “0.1 mm of the position (machine coordinate) set atthe parameter setting screen.

(3) How to Read the Input Logic TablesThe input logic tables show the ATC steps in the left part and the ON/OFF status of the inputsignals required to complete the individual steps is indicated in the corresponding lines.The Auto-branch data indicates that if M228 is executed, the ATC sequence No. branches tothe specified sequence.

: Inputs that must be ON.

A/ : Input conditions for A mode

B/ : Input conditions for B mode

: Inputs that may be either ON or OFF.

(The input conditions that correspond to [ ] of the B–test data must be OFF. For the B–test data, refer to the input logic tables.)

SA: Sub arm

RS: Ready station

EA: Tool change arm

MG: Magazine

T: Turret


3-2. Output Logic Tables

The output logic tables indicate the signals output at each ATC operation sequence.

(1) Symbols

LE32114R0400400090001

(2) Operation Output Items

a. ON/OFF status of all output items can be checked at the CHECK DATA ATC OUTPUTscreen (See also 8. “ATC Status Display”.).

(3) How to Read the Output Logic TablesThe output logic tables show the ATC steps in the left part and the ON/OFF status of the inputsignals required to execute the individual steps is indicated in the corresponding lines.

3-3. Manual Interlock Tables

During manual ATC operation using the 1-step advance/1-step reverse function, ATC operationsequence advances or returns by one step when all of the input conditions indicated in the interlocktables are satisfied.The tables can be read in the same manner as the input and output logic tables.Manual step branch and manual step back show the destination of ATC sequence number whereoperation branches during 1-step advance/1-step reverse operation.

: ON output

: OFF output

A/ : A–mode output

B/ : B–mode output

: Outputs that go OFF when the NC is reset during operation

SA: Sub armRS: Ready stationEA: Tool change armMG: MagazineT: Turret


4. Manual Operation

4-1. Manual Magazine Operation

4-1-1. Magazine Operation Panel (MACTURN 250/350/550)

LE32114R0400400110001

The magazine operation panel screen transfers in the manner as illustrated above.As the main screen, the manual magazine operation screen and the tool entry screen are providedand the selection of the desired main screen is possible by pressing the [ ] or [ ] button (pagebutton). These main screens has sub pop-up screens used for setting the magazine pot and toolrelated data (index number, tool number, tool kind and tool size). To call the desired sub screen,press the corresponding button as shown above.

INT

POT NO.

TOOL NO.

INDEX NO.

32

19 L STD

32

CCW CW INDEX RESTART

CLRTOOL NO.

POT NO.

KIND

KIND SIZE

SETSIZE

32

19

L

STD

INDEX NO.

8

5

2

CLR

9

6

3

ENT

7

4

1

0

NO.1234

(Index Number Setting) (Tool Number Setting) (Tool Kind Setting) (Tool Size Setting)

8

5

2

CLR

9

6

3

ENT

7

4

1

0

NO.1234BR

STD

B

E

H

R- large

Standard

L- large

E- large

Heavy

L

M

S

DT

Turning

Mil lng

Senser

Dummy

TOOL NO.

(Manual Magazine Operation Screen) (Tool Entry Screen)


(1) Manual Magazine Operation ScreenUse this screen to manually index the magazine.

a. [INT] buttonThe magazine operation panel may be used only in the manual intervention state. The[INT] button is not operative in the following cases.

• The present ATC sequence is neither the ATC start state nor the next tool preparedstate.

• An ATC command is being executed.

• The ATC is in the manual operation mode.

• A tool is being manually mounted/removed at the turret.

• The magazine is waiting for the pressing of the [RESTART] button (blinking).

The indicating lamp at the side of the [INT] button lights when the magazine enters themanual intervention state.To cancel the manual intervention state, press the [INT] button again. If the button ispressed while the magazine is rotating or the magazine is waiting for the pressing ofthe [INDEX] button (blinking), pressing of the [INT] button is disregarded and the man-ual intervention state is not canceled.

b. [POT No.] buttonThe button is used to index the magazine by designating the magazine pot number.Press this button before pressing the [INDEX No.] button and the magazine pot numbercan be designated.The magazine pot number of the magazine pot that is currently indexed to the manual toolmounting/removal position is displayed in the field at the right of the [POT No.] button.In the state the pot number designation is selected, the [POT No.] button is displayed in theON state.

c. [TOOL No.] buttonThe button is used to index the magazine by designating the tool number.Press this button before pressing the [INDEX No.] button and the tool number can be des-ignated.The information of the tool stored in the magazine pot that is currently indexed to the man-ual tool mounting/removal position is displayed in the field at the right of the [TOOL No.]button.In the state the tool number designation is selected, the [TOOL No.] button is displayed inthe ON state.

d. [INDEX No.] buttonThe button is used to display the 10-key sub screen used for setting a pot number or a toolnumber. After selecting the designation target (pot number or tool number) by the operationin (b) or (c), press the [INDEX No.] key and the 10-key sub screen appears. Input the pot ortool number and press the [ENT] key, then the pop-up screen is cleared. The designatedindex number is displayed in the field at the right of the [INDEX No.] button.


e. [CCW] buttonThe button is used to rotate the magazine counterclockwise to index the next pot. Themagazine keeps rotating if the button is kept pressed. Note the button is not operativeunless the following conditions are satisfied.

• The magazine is not rotating.

• The magazine door is closed.

• The sub-arm is at either the RS position or the standby position.

• The tool in the manual tool mounting/removal position is clamped (only for MACTURN550).

f. [CW] buttonThe button is used to rotate the magazine clockwise to index the next pot. The magazinekeeps rotating if the button is kept pressed. Note the button is not operative unless the fol-lowing conditions are satisfied.

• The magazine is not rotating.

• The magazine door is closed.

• The sub-arm is at either the RS position or the standby position.

• The tool in the manual tool mounting/removal position is clamped (only for MACTURN550).

g. [INDEX] buttonThe button is used to index the magazine pot or the tool of the number displayed at theINDEX No. data field into the manual tool removal/mounting position along the shortestpath. The [INDEX] button is lit while the magazine is rotating to index the specified target(tool or pot).The [INDEX] button begins blinking if the magazine enters the slide hold state during itsrotation, started by the pressing of the [INDEX] button. When the [INDEX] button is pressedin the state all of the conditions stated in items (e) and (f) are satisfied, the magazine startsrotating again.

h. [RESTART] buttonWhen an ATC command is read while the magazine is in the manual intervention state or inthe state the magazine door is open, execution of the ATC command is suspended. Whenthe magazine is set in the ATC command executable state by canceling the manual inter-vention state by closing the magazine door, the [RESTART] button starts blinking. Pressthe [RESTART] button while it is blinking. The button stops blinking and the ATC commandis executed.

i. [ ] (page) buttonPress the [ ] (page) button while the magazine is in the manual intervention state tochange the screen to the tool entry screen.


(2) Tool Entry ScreenUse this screen to set the information of the tools to be stored in the magazine.

a. POT NO. displayThis displays the magazine pot number of the pot indexed at the manual tool mounting/removal position.

b. TOOL No.] buttonThe button is used to set the tool number of the tool presently located at the manual toolmounting/removal position.The 10-key sub screen appears when this button is pressed. Input the tool number andpress the [ENT] key. The input number is displayed in the data field at the right of the[TOOL No.] button.

c. [KIND] buttonThe button is used to set the tool kind of the tool presently located at the manual toolmounting/removal position.The tool kind setting sub screen appears when this button is pressed. Select the tool kind,and the selected tool kind is displayed in the data field at the right of the [KIND] button.When the tool kind is selected, “STD” is automatically displayed for [SIZE].

d. [SIZE] buttonThe button is used to set the tool size of the tool presently located at the manual toolmounting/removal position.The tool size setting sub screen appears when this button is pressed. Select the tool size,and the selected tool size is displayed in the data field at the right of the [SIZE] button.

e. [CLR] buttonThe button is used to clear the information displayed at the tool entry screen. That is, toolnumber is cleared to “0000” and the settings of the tool kind and tool size are cleared andthe data fields are blanked.

f. [SET] buttonThe button is used to enter the tool information displayed at the tool entry screen.The tool information having been set using the sub screens is simply displayed at the toolentry screen unless the [SET] button is pressed. To enter the set tool information displayedat the tool entry screen, the [SET] button must be pressed. If the tool entry screen ischanged to another screen before you press the [SET] button, the tool information havingbeen selected using the sub screens is discarded.When the [SET] button is pressed while leaving the KIND and SIZE data fields blank, “DT”(dummy tool) and “STD” (standard) are entered, respectively.

g. [ ] (page) buttonPress the [ ] (page) button while the magazine is in the manual intervention state tochange the screen to the manual magazine operation screen.


(3) Error Display ScreenIf an operation error is made during the operation at the magazine operation panel, an errormessage is displayed. Press the [ ] button to clear the error screen.

(4) Tool Number Display for Dummy Pot and Reserved PotIf a tool pot set as a dummy or reserved pot is indexed to the manual tool mounting/removalposition, the following code is displayed as a tool kind. Dummy pot D Reserved pot RIn this case, the tool number of the corresponding tool is displayed in the [TOOL NO.] data field.

Error Code Error Message Description20002 ATC tool number

registrationAn attempt was made to enter the tool number having been entered to other pot.

20003 Tool number not found

Tool selection command to index a tool which has not been entered was executed.

20004 Large-tool registra-tion error

An attempt was made to enter a large-diameter tool to a pot where such entry is not allowed.

20005 Fixed pot registration error

Tool entry was made for a reserved pot.

20006 Fixed pot delete error

Tool deletion was made for a reserved pot.

20007 Pot number not found

Tool selection command to index a non-existing pot number was executed.


4-1-2. Magazine Operation Panel (MULTUS-B300/B400)

(1) MG Manual InterruptionWhen the ATC operation sequence number is “S1 Waiting for next tool command” or “S7 Wait-ing for machine cycle end”, the MG manual interruption mode can be established by turning onthe interruption ON/OFF select SW. Once the machine enters MG manual interruption mode,the mode is not turned off even if the machine is reset. To switch the mode OFF, the followingoperation is required.However, the machine does not enter MG manual interruption mode under the following situa-tions even if the ATC operation sequence is set to the above numbers. To enter MG manualinterruption mode, the interruption ON/OFF select SW must be turned on after canceling the fol-lowing states.

- Executing the ATC manual operation, ATC individual operation or manually attaching orremoving the turret tool- Executing the ATC command (MT, M06, M228 and MG commands)- The machine is operating.- The machine is locked.

When the “Interruption ON/OFF Select” SW on the MG panel is turned off while the machine isin MG manual operation interruption mode, the MG manual interruption mode is turned off.Although the main MG manual interruption can be disabled regardless of the ATC operationsequence, the “MG door is closed” is required to disable the MG manual interruption. The MGmanual interruption cannot be disabled even if the interruption mode is selected while the MGmanual operation interruption is enabled and the MG door is not closed.The status of main MG manual interruption mode is not stored when the machine is turned off,so that the main MG manual interruption is turned off when the machine is turned on again.

The MG manual operation interruption cannot be turned off while the MG is rotating. MG man-ual interruption mode is turned off when the interruption ON/OFF select SW is turned off afterthe MG stops rotating.

(2) MG Manual RotationThe magazine can be manually rotated by using the MG panel when the “MG manual interrup-tion mode is turned on” and “MG door is closed”. The key operation made on the MG panel isignored and the magazine does not rotate when the “MG door is not closed” even if the “MGmanual interruption mode is turned on”.

Although the “MG door is unlocked” when the “MG manual interruption mode is turned on”, the“MG door is locked” while the magazine is rotating.

[Supplement]

The manual rotation is not accepted unless the following conditions for rotating the magazine aremet.

• The MG door is closed.• The ready station is positioned at the “RS MG position” and “RS tool extraction position”


(3) Emergency StopThis button functions in the same way as the emergency stop button on the operation panel andmachine panel.

LE32114R0400400120001

ONOFF

Manual Interruption

Magazine Manual Interruption

Manual Interruption

Door Interlock

Restart

Emergency Stop

ONOFF


4-1-3. Magazine Door

The interlock functions related to magazine door operation are described below.The magazine door is locked by the electromagnetic lock in the following statuses and thus it cannotbe opened.

• During ATC operation

• During magazine rotation

• In the magazine manual operation intervention mode OFF state

• NC is running.

Even under these statuses, the electromagnetic lock does not lock the magazine door in the follow-ing cases.

• In the machine lock state

• Magazine door open signal is OFF.

• Alarm message “Please open the magazine door” is displayed.

When the magazine door is not closed

(1) Any of following operation or command causes an alarm.

• Jog switch or pulse handle operation to feed an axis

• Rotation or inching operation of the spindle, sub-spindle and the M-tool spindle

• Turret indexing operation

• Axis feed commands

• Rotation or orientation command of the spindle, sub-spindle and the M-tool spindle

• C-axis connection command

• Turret index command

(2) An alarm occurs if ATC operation is attempted.

• Manual ATC operation

• ATC command (MT, M06, M228 or MG command)

(3) Although manual ATC operation is enabled by the setting at the “MACHINE SYSTEM PARAM-ETER” screen, starting manual ATC operation causes an alarm.

(4) Manual turret tool mounting/removal operation is permitted by pressing the [MANUAL TOOLEXCHANGE] key.If the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key is pressed when the M-tool spindle is unclamped, analarm will occur in response to the execution of the M-tool spindle orientation which is initiatedby the pressing of the [MANUAL TOOL EXCHANGE] key.


4-1-4. Mounting/Removing a tool Manually

To manually mount or remove a tool at the pot indexed to the manual tool mounting/removal posi-tion, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Move the ZA-axis to the work position using the machine operation panel at the front of themachine.

2 Set the magazine manual operation intervention mode using the magazine operation panel atthe rear of the machine.

3 Index the tool to be changed to the manual tool mounting/removal position.

4 Open the magazine door after the magazine has stopped.

5 Mount/remove a tool using a special jig.

6 Close the magazine door and set the magazine manual operation intervention mode OFF.


4-2. Manual ATC Operation

The manual ATC operation can be done by pressing the ATC key in the function selection keys onthe additional panel. The turret tool can be manually changed using the tool mount/dismount com-mand, turret tool clamp and turret tool unclamp keys.

LE32114R0400400150001

LE32114R0400400150002

ATC key in the function selection Keys


(1) Turret IndexingThe turret can be indexed in either of the two positions; ATC position and cutting position. Whenthe turret is indexed by using the TURRET INDEX key after selecting “INDEX TO ATC POSI-TION” or INDEX TO CUTTING POSITION, the turret index status is changed. Although theindexing status of the cutting position indexing reference point is similar to the ATC positionindexing, the turret must be in the ATC position indexing status while the ATC cycle is in pro-cess. Therefore, care the difference when operating the ATC.

(2) Manual OperationWhen the RESET button on the operation panel is pressed while the ATC command is exe-cuted, the ATC operation stops while the operation output corresponding to the output logictable for the ATC sequence is made. To restore the ATC operation, the machine must entermanual operation mode and return to the state before executing the ATC operation by pressingthe 1-STEP ADVANCE or 1-STEP REVERSE button.

1-CYCLE START buttonA series of tool change operation is executed between the tool in the magazine pot indexed tothe ATC position and the tool in the turret indexed to the ATC position. The tool change opera-tion pauses while preparing the next tool if the 1-CYCLE START button is pressed without exe-cuting the ATC position indexing and tool change position determination for the turret tochange.

1-STEP ADVANCE buttonThe ATC operation sequence is executed step by step each time this button is pressed. Themachine moves to the next step unless the current sequence operation is completed. Eachsequence operation can be only if all of conditions shown in the input logic table are met.

1-STEP REVERSE buttonThe ATC operation sequence is executed step by step in the reverse order each time this but-ton is pressed. The 1 step reverse cannot be executed in the ATC operation sequence 1.

INTERLOCK RELEASE buttonThis button is used to restore the ATC operation if it has been stooped halfway due to occur-rence of an alarm.

(3) Shutter Open/CloseManually open or close the shutter provided between the machine and the ATC.

[Supplement]

INDEX ATC POS: When the TURRET CCW key is pressed, the turret is indexed to the ATC position.

INDEX CUT POS: The turret rotates in the selected direction that corresponds to the NOR-MAL or REVERSE and the turret is indexed to the cutting position.

SHUTTER OPEN : The shutter opens.SHUTTER CLOSE : The shutter closes.

Shutter operation (opening/closing) is disabled in the following cases and operation of the shutterswitches is disregarded.

• The tool change arm is not at the EA rotation position A or C


[Supplement]

(4) Manual Tool Change for Turret-Mounted Tools

LE32114R0400400150003

The tool can be mounted or dismounted to the turret in manual mount/dismount mode whenmanually changing the tool mounted to the turret without changing the ATC.

Procedure :

1 Index the turret to the ATC position or BA = 0°.

2 Select the manual operation mode and close the front door.

3 Press the Manual tool change request key. The M-tool spindle stops at the home position andthe axis is clamped. In this case, the LED in the Manual tool change request key blinks.

4 When manual tool change mode is selected, the LED in the Manual tool change ON key lights.

5 Press the Turret tool unclamp key. The tool inserted into the turret is clamped.

6 Insert a new tool into the turret and press the turret tool clamp key to clamp the tool.

7 Press the Manual tool change request key again. This cancels the manual tool change modeand the LED in the key turns off.

8 Select the tool data setting mode and enter the tool data of the newly mounted tool. This oper-ation must be executed.

When the ATC operation sequence is executed in the state the shutter is opened by the shutteropen switch or when the shutter is opened then closed by the shutter open and close switches inthe state the shutter is open during the execution of ATC operation sequence, the shutter will notbe closed in later ATC operation sequence even if the sequence includes shutter close operation.To close the shutter in such state, use the CLOSE switch.


[Supplement]

[Supplement]

Manual tool change mode cannot be established even if the Manual tool change request key ispressed unless the following conditions are satisfied.

• The spindle is stopped.• The rotary tool is stopped.• The turret is not rotating.

While in the manual tool change mode, following manual operations are disregarded.• Spindle rotation• Rotary tool rotation• Other ATC manual operations• Turret rotation


5. ATC Program Commands

5-1. ATC Commands

The ATC commands are explained below. Those in ( ) are for the OSP capable of managing 200sets of tool data (optional). When handling 200 sets of tool data, specify a tool number and a tool off-set number in three digits.

(1) MT = **∆∆...................Next tool preparation command (MT = ∆∆)The tool designated by the tool number (or ) is indexed by the magazine and is set inthe ready station as the next tool. The turret station number ∆∆ is retained until the M06 com-mand is designated next.

(2) TC = ∆∆...................Turret index to the ATC position commandThe command indexes the turret, specified by ∆∆, to the ATC position.

(3) M06...................Tool change commandThe command exchanges the tool indexed to the turret ATC position with the tool prepared atthe ready station. The tool removed from the turret is returned to the magazine.

(4) TL = ** ...................Tool number index command (TL = )The command rotates the turret to index the specified turret-mounted tool to the cutting posi-tion.

: Nose R compensation number: Tool offset number

(Optional specification)For the 200-pair tool management specification, the nose R compensation number must be thesame number as the tool offset number. It is not allowed to designate different numbers. Thecommand for indexing the turret to the position vertical to the cutting position is as indicatedbelow.TL = ** BT = 1

(5) M228...................Tool return commandThe command returns the tool prepared as the next tool to the magazine.

(6) MG = ...................Magazine index commandThe command rotates the magazine to index the magazine pot specified by to the ATCposition.

(7) G21 HP = “1“...................ATC position return command(the command for moving the turret to the tool change position)The command is used to move the turret to the tool change position. If the tool change positionis other than “Y = 0”, designate the G21 command in the Y-axis mode.


(8) M204/M205...................Shutter close/open commandThese commands close and open the shutter provided between the machining area of themachine and the ATC.Shutter close operation is disabled in the following cases and execution of the shutter closecommand in these statuses causes an alarm and the following alarm message is displayed.Alarm A 1807 Shutter close impossible

• The tool change arm is not located in EA retract position A or EA retract position B.

• (Actual X-axis position of the turret) > (X-axis travel limit in the positive direction (system parameter setting))

[Supplement]

(9) M227...................ATC operating completion wait commandAmong ATC operation steps, the next tool preparation operation and the tool return operationcan be executed independent of the operation of the machine. Accordingly, the answer signal isreturned immediately when the MT command is executed, and for the M06 command, theanswer signal is returned when the ATC operation sequence reaches the tool return cycle startstate. This means that the command specified following the MT or M06 command can be exe-cuted simultaneously with the ATC operation. However, if the operation to be executed next tothe M06 command is opening the front door, the front door must be opened only after the com-pletion of all ATC operations to ensure safety.Therefore, the command that suspends front door opening operation until the completion ofATC operations is provided.When the M227 command is specified in the block next to the one containing the MT or M06command, the commands specified following M227 are executed only after all ATC operationshave been completed.

(10) M08/M09...................Turret coolant ON/OFFThe command automatically recognizes the turret station indexed to the cutting position (basecutting position, vertical cutting position, B-axis cutting position) and supplies turret coolant fromthe coolant discharge position of that turret station. If the turret is indexed to the ATC position orwhen the turret index operation has not been completed, coolant is not supplied even if the tur-ret coolant ON command is executed.

When the ATC operation sequence is executed in the state the shutter is opened by the shutteropen command or when the shutter is closed then opened by the shutter open and close com-mands in the state the shutter is open during the execution of ATC operation sequence, the shut-ter will not be closed in later ATC operation sequence even if the sequence includes shutter closeoperation.To close the shutter in such state, use the shutter close command.Examples:

• Executing an ATC operation sequence in the state the shutter is open by the execution of theM205 command.→ The shutter is not closed even if a step where the shutter should be closed is executed.

• Executing an ATC operation sequence continuously by once closing/opening the shutter byexecuting the M204/M205 command after the shutter was opened by the ATC operationsequence.→ The shutter is not closed even if a step where the shutter should be closed is executed.


5-2. ATC Macro Commands

Positioning to the tool change position can be executed by specifying an ATC macro commandG171.Macro M code, M421 that includes both G171 and M06 can execute positioning to the tool changeposition and tool change cycle by a single command.

(1) G171_ATP = “1”...................Command for positioning at tool change position(“_” represents a space.)The command includes the following three operations. Indexing turret station “1” into the ATC position Y-axis mode ON Positioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to the selected tool type (station “1”), by the “G21 HP = “1” ” commandAfter the execution of this command, the Y-axis mode is turned ON.To index the turret to the ATC position by the “G171 ATP = ∆∆” command, the turret must be atthe variable limit in the positive direction. If the turret is not at the variable limit in the positivedirection when this command is executed, the turret remains in the operating status since theturret cannot be indexed.

(2) G171_AHP = ...................Command for positioning at tool change positionThe command includes the following three operations. Y-axis mode ON Positioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to “AHP = “, by the“G21 HP = ” command. Y-axis mode OFF if “AHP = 4”After the execution of “G171 AHP = 1, 2”, the machine is in the Y-axis mode.After the execution of “G171 AHP = 4”, the Y-axis mode is OFF.

(3) M421...................Positioning at tool change position/Tool change/Positioning at return positionThe command includes the following six operations. Indexing the turret station ∆∆ to the ATC position according to the MT command executed before M421. Y-axis mode ON Positioning of the turret to the tool change position, corresponding to the selected tool type (station ∆∆), by the “G21 HP = ” command Tool change Executing “G21 HP = 4” (After the execution of tool change operation, the turret always returns to the return position “4”) Y-axis mode OFFFor the execution of M421, two conditions indicated below must be satisfied.a) The MT command has been executed.b) The turret is at the variable limit in the positive direction (X-axis), or the turret is indexed tothe ATC position.If the M421 command is executed although these conditions are not satisfied, an alarm occurs.Alarm B 2288 User reserve codeIf the NC is reset after the execution of an MT command, execute the MT command againbefore M421.


[Supplement]

5-3. Others

(1) The A turret rotates when the following conditions are satisfied.

a. (Saddle YS-axis positioning position) ≥ (Spindle center line position set for system parame-ter)

b. The X- and Z-axis positions of the saddle satisfy the following relationship.(Variable limits of X/Z in the positive direction) ≤ (Saddle X/Z-axis positioning position)≤ (Travel end limit of X/Z-axis)

(2) An alarm occurs if the turret is rotated in the state the tool change arm is in the machine.

[Supplement]

(3) If the RESET button on the machine operation panel is pressed during the execution of an ATCcommand, ATC operation stops in the state the operation signals are output according to theATC sequence output logic at the moment the RESET button is pressed.To restore the ATC operation, select the manual mode and return the ATC to the state beforethe execution of ATC operation using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons.

Since G171 and M421 commands are macro commands, these commands call the correspond-ing macro subprograms from the operation area of the NC memory and execute them. Therefore,designation of these ATC macro commands is not allowed unless the corresponding macro sub-programs are stored in the operation area of the NC memory.Macro subprograms are automatically registered to the operation area of the NC memory whenthe operation mode is switched to the automatic operation mode for the first time after turning onthe power.To execute G171 or M421 immediately after turning on the power, change the operation mode tothe automatic mode before executing them.For details of subprograms called by the execution of G171 or M421, refer to 11-2. “ATC MacroCommand Subprograms”.

The state “the tool change arm is in the machine” means the following state.The tool change arm rotation status is not the EA rotation retraction position.


5-4. Example Programs

5-4-1. For the Model without Tool Life Management Specification

Return position: HP = 4L-tool number: 3, 4M-tool number: 11, 12Example 1:

LE32114R0400400190001

N001 M03 S500 M42

N002 G00 X5000 Z400 Positioning at the turret rotation position

N003 MT = 0401 Tool preparation command

(04 ..... Tool number)

N004 G171 ATP =1 Turret rotation and positioning at the tool change position

N005 M06 Tool change command

N006 MT =0301 Tool preparation command


N007 G171 AHP =4 Travel to return position


N009 TL = 040404 Indexing the turret to the cutting position

N010 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start

Program for turning process


N022 G171 ATP =1 Turret rotation and positioning at the tool change position



N024 G171 AHP =4 Travel to return position


N026 TL =030303 Indexing the turret to the cutting position



N041 G00 X5000 Z400 Turret rotation position



N043 G171 ATP =1 turret rotation and positioning at the tool change position

N044 M06 Tool change position

N045 G171 ATP =4 Travel to return position



N048 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start, shutter close

M049 MT = 1201 Tool preparation command

(12 ..... Tool number)Program for milling process

:

N999 M02


Example 2:

LE32114R0400400190002

[Supplement]

In Example 2:If tool No. 11 is already mounted in turret station, the following commands are ignored and theoperation proceeds to N044 and on. N042 MT=1101 N043 M421In other words, execution of the next tool preparation command MT and the ATC macro com-mand M421 is completed without actual processing if the tool specified by the next tool prepara-tion command MT is always mounted in the specified turret station.

N001 M03 S500 M42


N003 MT = 0401 Tool preparation command


N004 M421 ATC macro command (Tool No. 04 change)













N041 G00 X5000 Z400 Turret rotation position






N046 G00 X500 Z500 Cutting start, shutter close



Program for milling process

:

N999 M02


5-4-2. For the Model with Tool Life Management Specification

Return position: HP = 4L-tool number: 3, 4M-tool number: 5, 6Example 3:

LE32114R0400400200001

[Supplement]

For the tool life management specification, designate a TG command (tool group number com-mand) with the MT command in the same block. In this case, designate “00” for the tool numberof the MT command.

N001 TLID


N003 TG = 04 MT = 01 Tool preparation command(The MT command must always be specified inMT=00 ** )

N004 G070 ATP =1 Positioning at the tool change position


N006 TG =03 MT =01 Tool preparation command

N007 G171 AHP =4

N008 G00 X5000 Z400

N009 TG = 04 OG = 01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position




N022 G171 ATP =1 Positioning at the tool change position


N024 G171 AHP =4

N025 G00 X5000 Z400





N042 TG = 05 MT =01 Tool preparation command

N043 G171 ATP =3


N045 G171 AHP =4

N046 G00 X5000 Z400



M049 TG = 06 MT = 01 Tool preparation command


:

N999 M02


Example 4:

LE32114R0400400200002

[Supplement]

In Example 4:If a tool of tool group number 5 is already mounted in turret station, the following commands areignored and the operation proceeds to N044 and on. N042 TG=05 MT=01 N043 M421In other words, execution of the next tool preparation command MT and the ATC macro com-mand M421 is completed without actual processing if the tool belonging to the tool group speci-fied by the next tool preparation command MT is always mounted in the specified turret station.

N001 TLID


N003 TG = 04 MT = 01 Tool preparation command(The MT command must always be specified inMT=00 **)

N004 M421 ATC macro command

N005 TG =03 MT =01 Tool preparation command

N006 G00 X5000 Z400

N007 TG =04 OG =01 Indexing the turret to the cutting position





N023 G00 X5000 Z400





N042 TG = 05 MT =01 Tool preparation command


N044 G00 X5000 Z400



N047 TG = 06 MT = 01 Tool preparation command


:

N999 M02


6. Automatic OperationFor details of operating procedure in the automatic operation mode, refer to the Operation Manualfor OSP-E100L.This section deals with the operation procedure of the functions specific to the ATC specification.

6-1. Sequence Return Procedure

The sequence return function allows the automatic operation, interrupted due to resetting or emer-gency stop, to restart from the sequence one block before the sequence where the operation wasinterrupted.Among the ATC related commands, the commands indicated below do not execute ATC operationeven if a sequence return is executed.

• MT command

• MG command

• M204/M205 command

• M06 command

• M228 command

Operation example:

LE32114R0400400220001

OSHT1

N0100 G171 AHP =4

N0101 G50 S3500

N0102 G97 S500 M41 M03 M08

N0103 M205 MT = 2001

N0104 G171 ATP =1

N0105 M06

NAT20 TL =202020

N0106 G00 X250 Z200

N0107 Z150.5

N0108 MT = 3001

To execute sequence return from N0107:Operation restarts from sequence N0106.When restarting the operation from sequence N0106, the tool of tool No. 20 must be in the turret. Therefore, this tool must be mounted in the turret before the operation is restarted.


Procedure :

1 Mount No. 20 tool in the turret.Select the MDI mode and execute the following.[M], [T], [=], [2], [0], [0], [1], [WRITE][START][F1] (DATA INPUT), [T], [C], [=], [1], [WRITE][START][F1] (DATA INPUT), [M], [0], [6], [WRITE][START]

2 Check the actual ATC sequence number by displaying the ATC STATUS DISPLAY screen ofthe check data in the automatic, MDI or manual mode (Refer to 8. “ATC Status Display”.)If the sequence number is not “1”, return the actual ATC operation sequence number to “1” bymanually operating the ATC.

3 Execute the sequence restart operation by selecting the automatic mode.


6-2. Cautions on Using the Program Check/Graphic Scale Automatic Setting Function while in Machine Lock Status

Cautions to be paid for using the program check and the graphic scale automatic setting functionswhile the machine lock function is ON are shown below.Machining may be carried out in two modes - to carry out machining by changing the tool mountedin the turret using the ATC and to carry out machining by selecting the tool with the TL command(TG/OG command of the tool life management specification) from the turret-mounted tools.In either case, although it is possible to check the program in the machine lock status, the followingpoints must be taken into consideration on using the TL command (or TG/OG command).Operation example:

LE32114R0400400230001

If the example program above is checked in the machine lock status, in the status No. 20 tool is notmounted in the turret, an alarm occurs (Alarm B ATC TL).This is because the same alarm (Alarm B ATC TL) also occurs if machining is started immediatelyafter resetting the alarm state, making machining impossible.To execute program check, follow either of the procedure indicated below:

• Mount No. 20 tool to the turret before turning the machine lock function on, then execute pro-gram check.

The program shows the case - No. 20 tool is already mounted in the turret (T3 station) and tool change by ATC is not necessary.Since the program itself is correct, actual machining can be executed without problems. However, when checking the program, an alarm occurs at the sequence including the TL command due to the machine lock function if the tool of No. 20 tool is not mounted in the turret.

OSHT2

N0100 G00 X500 Z500

N0101 G50 S3500

N0102 G97 S500 M41 M03 M08

NAT20 TL = 202020

N0106 G00 X250 Z200

N0107 Z150.5

N0108 MT = 3001

NC program using No. 20 tool


• Set the initial status of the tool mounted in the turret, for the program to be checked, at the ATCTOOL INFORMATION screen (refer to 7-2. “Tool Information”) before turning on the machinelock function, then execute program check.

For the example program shown in the previous page, set the tool data of the turret mounted tool(No. 20 tool) for T3 before turning on the machine lock function. After that turn on the machine lockfunction and execute program check.(After finishing program check, return the setting to the previous state.)

LE32114R0400400230002

[Supplement]

When TG/OG command provided for the tool life management specification is used, an alarmoccurs (Alarm B 2411 TOOL LIFE CONTROL tool group). In this case follow the same steps asindicated above.When the automatic tool layout function or the automatic scale setting function of the graphicfunction is used, an alarm also occurs if the program is made in the same manner as shown in theexample program. Take the same steps as indicated above to avoid the occurrence of an alarm.


7. Data Setting

7-1. Magazine Information

If a tool is manually mounted to the magazine, it is necessary to set the data of the mounted tool atthe ATC MAGAZINE INFORMATION screen in the tool data setting mode. Tool change using theATC is not possible unless the tool data is set correctly.

LE32114R0400400240001

Data Setting Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the tool data setting mode.

2 Select the ATC MAGAZINE INFORMATION screen by pressing the function key [F6] (ITEM ↑)or [F7] (ITEM↓), or pressing [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 Locate the cursor on the magazine pot number for which the tool data is set.

4 Press the function key [F1] (SET).


5 Set the tool data according to the format below.(A),(B),(C) [WRITE] (A) Tool number (B) Tool kind (L-tool/M-tool/Sensor) (C) Tool size/weight

• Tool No.Set a number in the range of 0 to 96. Since “0” represents “no tool”, if you set “0” for themagazine number for which the data has already been set, the data is deleted. (If “0” isset, setting is not necessary for tool kind and tool size/weight.)The magazine pots arranged before and after the pot storing a large-diameter tool aretreated as a dummy pot and “D” is displayed for such pots at the TOOL NO. column.

• Tool kindTo designate a tool kind, enter the following codes. L: Turning tool M: Milling tool S: SensorIf no tool kind is set although a tool number is set, the tool is recognized as a dummy tooland “DT” is displayed.

• Tool size/weightFor the standard sized tools and dummy tools, it is not necessary to set the size data.Select the identifier in the manner indicated below. [B]: L-large diameter [BR]: R-large diameter tool [E]: Super-large diameter tool [H]: Heavy tool [SL]: Large diameter tool (MULTUS-B300/B400 only)Note L-large, R-large, super-large diameter and large diameter tools are all handles as aheavy tool. For the standard tools are dummy tools, designation of tool size/weight is notnecessary.Note L-large, R-large and super-large diameter tools are all handled as a heavy tool.For the standard tools and dummy tools, designation of tool size/weight is not necessary.If L-large, R-large, or super-large diameter is designated, identifier “D” that represents adummy pot is set to the TOOL No. column at the preceding and/or succeeding magazinepot according to the tool size. Therefore, if tool data is already set for the magazine potwhich should be set as a dummy tool, designation of a large-diameter tool is not possible.Conversely, setting of the tool information is not allowed for the dummy pot.


Reserved PotsWhen a super-large, left-large, or right-large diameter tool is removed from the magazine pot andmounted in the turret, the pot where such a tool was stored is recognized as a reserved pot (the potreserved for returning the same tool). Therefore, no tools other than the one previously stored can-not be returned to the reserved pot.At the ATC MAGAZINE INFORMATION screen, identifier “R” is displayed at the TOOL No. columnof the reserved pot.

[Supplement]

LE32114R0400400240002

To cancel the designation of a reserved pot, set “0” at the TOOL No. column of the correspondingpot by following the steps indicated in item (1) “Data Setting Procedure”.Delete the data of the super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, which has been mounted tothe turret by the ATC, at the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen described in 7-2 “Tool Informa-tion”, and the reserved pot designation is automatically canceled.Designation for a reserved pot is automatically made during tool change operation. Therefore,when returning a super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool for which the reserved pot designa-tion has been canceled to the magazine, the ATC searches and returns the tool to an empty pot.


7-2. Tool Information

In the tool data setting mode, the information related to the tools mounted in the turret should bedesignated. When a tool is mounted in the turret using the ATC, the corresponding data is automati-cally set. However, if a tool is mounted to the turret manually, the tool information must be set manu-ally.

LE32114R0400400250001

Setting Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the tool data setting mode.

2 Select the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen by pressing the function key [F6] (ITEM ↑) or[F7] (ITEM↓), or pressing [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE).

3 Move the cursor to the turret number for which the tool data is set.

4 Set the tool data in the same manner as a magazine tool.

Setting or Altering the Large-diameter Tool Data

• When the tool data is deleted at the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen for the super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, after mounting it from the magazine to the turret, the reservedpot designation of the corresponding pot is automatically canceled.

• For the super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, mounted to the turret by ATC, it is not pos-sible to alter the data at the ATC TOOL INFORMATION screen. Delete the data once and setthe desired data after that. Or, cancel the reserved pot designation for that tool and then alterthe tool data.

• When a super-large, L-large or R-large diameter tool, manually mounted to the turret, isreturned to the magazine using the ATC, the ATC searches and returns the tool to an emptypot.


8. ATC Status DisplayWhen operating the ATC in the automatic, MDI or manual mode, the ATC status and the EC input/output signal status can be checked by displaying the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY, MACHINE DIAG-NOSIS, I/O CHECK and other screens.

8-1. ATC Status Display Screen

Displaying Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the automatic, MDI or manual mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the ATC CONDITION DISPLAYscreen. The ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen consists of two pages, which can be switchedusing the PAGE key.To display the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen (2/2), select “ATC Individual operation”with the machine system parameter “System check mode” on the SYSTEM CHECK MODEscreen.

ATC Status Display Screen (1/2)

LE32114R0400400270001

ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen: Displays the overall ATC operation status.ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen:(Page 2)

Displays the status of the following devices used for the ATC.

Input status: proximity switches, limit switches, operation panel switches and keys

Output status: solenoid valves


Displayed information:

ATC SEQ. NO : Displays the current ATC operation sequence number.MG ATC POS. POT NO. : Displays the magazine pot number indexed to the ATC position.ATC POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the magazine pot indexed to the ATC

position.RS NEXT TOOL : Displays the data of the tool which has been stored in the ready

station and will be mounted in the turret.RETURN TOOL : Displays the data of the tool which has been removed from the

turret by ATC and stored in the ready station, and will be returned to the magazine.

TURRET ATC POS. NO. : Displays the turret station number indexed to the ATC position.ATC POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the turret station indexed to the ATC

position.CUT POS. NO. : Displays the turret station number indexed to the cutting posi-

tion.CUT POS. TOOL : Displays the tool data of the turret station indexed to the cutting

position.NEXT TOOL COM. MT= : Displays the content of the command specified for preparation

of the next tool.MG PANEL STATUS : Displays the communication status between CNC and the mag-

azine panel.ACTUAL POSITION : Display the actual position (in machine coordinate system) of

the tool in turret A.ATC START : Lights when the ATC is ready to execute MT command or M06

command.MACTURN30... ATC sequence No. 1, 11MACTURN50... ATC sequence No. 1, 8

ATC CYCLE ST. : Lights when the ATC cycle is in progress.TURRET INDEX : Lights when the turret A can rotate.NG PANEL INT. : Lights when the manual intervention is selected on the maga-

zine panel.


ATC Status Display Screen (2/2)MACTURN 30

LE32114R0400400270002

This above screen allows you to check individual ATC operation commands and ATC operation sta-tuses with lamp indication.Normally, the STATUS lamp and the corresponding COMMAND lamp are in the same status. How-ever, mismatch will occur if the ATC operation is disabled for some reason.

8-2. Tool Data Display Screen

Even when an operation mode is selected, it is allowed to display the tool data in the same manneras in the tool data setting mode.Since the screen is provided for simply checking the set data, the screen cannot be used to alter theset data. To alter the set data, select the tool data setting mode.The information displayed at the screen is the same as the information at the screen displayed in thetool data setting mode.

Displaying Procedure

Procedure :

1 Select the automatic, MDI or manual mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the screen menu.

3 Select a desired screen from the screen menu. If a screen consists of several pages, select adesired screen page using the PAGE keys.


8-3. Machine Diagnosis Screen

If the ATC or the magazine stops due to unsatisfied machine conditions, such conditions can bechecked on the diagnosis screen.If some conditions are missing in ATC sequence operation or magazine operation, the diagnosisscreen shows the cause.

Display procedure

Procedure :

1 Select any of AUTO, MDI, or MANUAL mode.

2 Press the function key [F8] (DISPLAY CHANGE) to display the diagnosis screen.

3 If the screen consists of several pages, select a required page.

Machine Diagnosis Screen

LE32114R0400400290001

The following diagnosis messages are displayed.

“10403 MG Manual Interruption OFF is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the magazine manual interruption isnot turned on.

“10414 Ready Station Magazine position LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station magazine positionconfirmation is not turned on.

“10420 Shutter Open LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ATC shutter open confirmationinput is not turned on.


“10419 Shutter Close LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ATC shutter close confirmationinput is not turned on.

“10421 Turret ATC Position Indexing Completion is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret indexing angle is not posi-tioned at the ATC position during the turret rotation.

“10422 Turret Tool Change Position 2 is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret arenot set to the tool change position.

The tool change position can be set since the turret may index several stations. This message indi-cates that positions of X/Y/Z axes of the turret are not set to the registered tool change positions foreach station.

“10423 Turret Tool Change Position 1 is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret arenot set to the tool change positions.

This message indicates that positions of X/Y/Z axes of the turret are not set to the registered toolchange position for the indexed station. However, only one station and one tool change position areavailable since MULTUS-B300 is equipped with the H1 turret. Therefore, this message indicatesthat the X/Y/Z axes of the H1 turret are not set to the tool change positions.

“10424 Turret Tool is not clamped.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret tool is not clamped.

“10425 Turret Tool is not unclamped.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the turret tool is not unclamped.

“10426 M-tool spindle Indexing is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the M-tool spindle of the H1 turret isnot indexed to the angle where the tool is changed.

“10427 Magazine Indexing Match is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the magazine indexing is not com-pleted.

“10430 Tool Change Arm Movement to the advance position is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm is not moved tothe tool arm tool extract position due to the movement of the tool change arm axis (EZ axis).

“10431 Tool Change Arm Movement to the retract position is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm is not moved tothe tool arm tool insert position due to the movement of the tool change arm axis (EZ axis).

“10437 With MG Tool is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool ismounted to the magazine is turned on.

“10436 Without MG Tool is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool ismounted to the magazine is turned off.


“10448 Ready Station Magazine position LS is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station magazine positionconfirmation is not turned off.

“10456 Ready Station Change position LS is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station change positionconfirmation is not turned on.

“10458 Ready Station tool extraction is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool extraction posi-tion confirmation is not turned on.

“10461 With Turret Tool is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the input confirming that no tool ismounted to the turret is turned on.

“10472 Ready Station Change position LS is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station change positionconfirmation is not turned off.

“10481 Ready Station tool insertion is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool insertion is notturned on.

“10483 Ready Station tool insertion is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool insertion posi-tion confirmation is not turned off.

“10484 Ready Station tool extraction is not turned off.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the ready station tool extraction posi-tion confirmation is not turned on.

“10940 Tool Lock for the Tool Change Arm is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool lock confirmation for the toolchange arm is not turned on.

“10941 Tool Unlock for the Tool Change Arm is not turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool unlock confirmation for thetool change arm is not turned on.

“10947 Tool Lock for the Tool Change Arm is turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool lock confirmation for the toolchange arm is turned on.

“10948 Tool Unlock for the Tool Change Arm is turned on.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool unlock confirmation for thetool change arm is turned on.

“10949 Shutter Open EA Rotation is not turned on.”The ATC shutter of MULTUS-B300 is equipped with the input for checking the “position where thetool change arm can enter into the machine with rotation”. If the confirmation input is not turned on,the ATC unit cannot operate.

“10950 Tool Change Arm RS movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EZ axis) is notpositioned to the tool change arm RS position.


“10952 EA Rotation Position A movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is notpositioned to the tool change arm 0° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10953 EA Rotation Position B movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is notpositioned to the tool change arm 90° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10954 EA Rotation Position C movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is notpositioned to the tool change arm 180° with the tool arm axis rotation.

“10955 EA Rotation Position D movement is not completed.”This message indicates that the ATC unit cannot operate since the tool change arm (EC axis) is notpositioned to the tool change arm 270° position with the tool arm axis rotation.

8-4. ATC Input/Output Display Screen

With the I/O monitor function, the I/O CHECK screen shows the ON/OFF status of the input/outputsignals of the ATC operation panel and the ATC unit.See Appendix for the ATC input/output bit tables.


9. Parameter SettingSetting of the parameters used for controlling the ATC can be changed by selecting the parametersetting mode. To display the desired parameter, follow the procedure indicated below.

Procedure :

1 Select the parameter setting mode.

2 Select the page that contains the desired parameter by pressing function key [F6] (ITEM↑) and[F7] (ITEM↓).

9-1. ATC Tool Change Position and Movable Range

The ATC tool change position and the axis movable range are set for the parameters by the coordi-nate values in the machine coordinate system.Since the most appropriate values are set for these parameters before shipping, the setting must notbe changed.

ATC POS:P1: Tool change position

RETURN POS.When tool change cycle is executed, an axis may move beyond the axis travel range set for machin-ing. Therefore, turret rotation is not allowed at the ATC position.Concerning the Y-axis, it must be returned to the spindle center line position since it may move to aposition off the spindle center position.In such cases, axis movements are controlled using RETURN POS. 4 and 5.The ATC macro command M421 moves the turret to the return position 4 after the completion of toolchange operation.For the YS-axis, set the data so that it will be at the spindle center position set for the system param-eter.

G21 RANGE:The data sets the axis movable range for the operation to return to the home position called by G21.The axes can move beyond the range set by the variable limit setting data as long as they movewithin the range set by these parameters. Concerning the Z-axis, the range is identical to the rangeset by the variable limit setting.The position number corresponds to P1 - P5 of this parameter.

CAUTIONThe axis travel limits in moving to the ATC position set the saddle movable range in the status theturret is indexed to the ATC position and the shutter is open. The travel end limit data set for thesystem parameters sets the range where the saddle can move and the turret can rotate withoutinterference independent of the status of turret indexing and shutter open/close.For HP = 4, set the position so that all of the following conditions are satisfied.

• The YS-axis position is identical to the spindle center position set for the system parameter.• The X- and Z-axis positions are within the travel end limits and within the movable range limits.


[Supplement]

9-2. Magazine Axis Parameter

Set the parameters related to magazine control.

(1) Magazine Zero OffsetSet the data for MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET when the magazine position encoder is mountedfor the first time or after changing the magazine position encoder.Since the data is set before shipping the machine, usually the setting for this parameter is notnecessary. By setting the offset data, the magazine pot number displayed at the ATC CONDI-TION DISPLAY screen is matched with the actual machine magazine pot number.Setting procedurea) Move the cursor to the MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET item.b) Press function key [F3] (CAL).c) Input the pot number of the presently indexed magazine pot.d) Press the [WRITE] key.With the operation indicated above, the zero offset value is calculated and set.MAGAZINE ZERO OFFSET = (Actual position of position encoder) - (Magazine pot number of the pot indexed to the ATC position - 1) ×(360° magazine capacity)If the value obtained by the calculation indicated above is a negative value, the ZERO OFFSETvalue is re-calculated by adding 360.

(2) Magazine BacklashSet the backlash offset value as needed. Initial value:0 Setting unit:1°

(3) Magazine Droop Amount Initial value:0.005 Setting unit:1°

For the Z-axis position, set the same value as the L-tool change position, the face M-tool changeposition or the side M-tool change position to facilitate programming.


9-3. EC–axis (Tool Change Arm Rotation Axis) Parameter

Set the parameters related to the EC-axis (tool change arm rotation axis).

(1) Droop DataSet the droop data of the tool change arm rotation axis.

(2) Zero OffsetSet the zero offset data of the tool change arm rotation axis.For the point data (MC SYSTEM PARAMETER: EC POINT), set the value obtained by subtract-ing the zero offset value from the EC-axis position data (coordinate value in the machine coordi-nate system).

(3) -/+ LimitSet the limits of the EC-axis movable range by the coordinate values in the machine coordinatesystem. The EC-axis can be moved within the range set by the limit data set for these parame-ters.Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change thesettings.Usually, data setting is not necessary.

(4) BacklashSet the backlash amount of the EC-axis.

(5) Position Encoder OffsetSet the offset amount of the EC-axis position encoder.

9-4. EZ–axis (Tool Change Advance/Retraction Rotation Axis) Parame-ter (MULTUS-B300/B400)

Set the parameters related to the EZ-axis (tool change arm advance/retraction axis).

(1) Droop DataSet the droop data of the tool change arm advance/retraction axis.

(2) Zero OffsetSet the zero offset data of the tool change arm advance/retraction axis.For the point data (MC SYSTEM PARAMETER: EZ POINT), set the value obtained by subtract-ing the zero offset value from the EZ-axis position data (coordinate value in the machine coordi-nate system).

(3) -/+ LimitSet the limits of the EZ-axis movable range by the coordinate values in the machine coordinatesystem. The EZ-axis can be moved within the range set by the limit data set for these parame-ters.Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change thesettings.Usually, data setting is not necessary.

(4) BacklashSet the backlash amount of the EZ-axis.

(5) Position Encoder OffsetSet the offset amount of the EZ-axis position encoder.


9-5. Positioning Point EC (MULTUS-B300/B400)

Set the positioning points of the EC-axis (tool change arm rotation axis) for tool change operation.Set the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by subtracting the zero offset value.Set the positioning points 1, 2, 3 and 4 to determine the tool change arm rotation positions.ot EA RET. POS. A 1.POINT EA CLP. POS. A 2.POINT EA RET. POS. B 3.POINT EA CLP. POS. B 4.POINTSince the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the set-tings.Usually, data setting is not necessary. Input unit: 1/1000° Input range: -LIMIT to +LIMIT of ATC PARAMETER (EC)

9-6. Positioning Point EZ (MULTUS-B300/B400)

Set the positioning points of the EZ-axis (tool change arm advance/retraction axis) for tool changeoperation.Set the coordinate values in the machine coordinate system by subtracting the zero offset value.Set the positioning points 1 and 2 to determine the tool change arm retract and advance positions. EA RETRACT POS. 1.POINT EA ADVANCE POS. 2.POINTSince the most optimum values are set for these parameters before shipping, never change the set-tings.Usually, data setting is not necessary. Input unit: 1 m Input range: -LIMIT to +LIMIT of ATC PARAMETER (EZ)

9-7. Turret Index Angle

Set the turret index angles. Since the most optimum values are set for these parameters beforeshipping, never change the settings. Usually, data setting is not necessary.No. 1 to No. 4 are used to set the turret index target angle for indexing the turret to the cutting posi-tion, and No. 13 to No. 16 are used to set the turret index target angle for indexing the turret to theATC position.For H1 turret, the turret angle can be set only at No. 1 to 3 and No. 13.


9-8. Magazine Panel Communication Parameter

Set the RS232C device number used for the communication between the CNC and the magazinepanel.For details of the screen below, refer to the Instruction Manual for OSP-E100L.

(1) MG Panel RS232C Device No.Optional parameter (word) No. 81Set the device number used for the magazine panel.Initial value: 1 (CN1:)Setting range: 0 to 3

(2) Baud rate (bps)Initial value: 4800Setting range: 110 to 19200

(3) RS232C stop bitInitial value: 1Setting range: 0, 1

(4) RS232C parity bitInitial value: 1Setting range: 0, 1

(5) RS232C busy timeInitial value: 5Setting range: 1 to 99999


9-9. Setting the Tool Change Arm Rotation Positions Immediately after Installing the Control Software (MULTUS-B300/B400)

Immediately after the installation of the control software, the tool change arm rotation mode is indef-inite, mode A or mode B.Therefore, it is necessary to determine the tool change arm rotation mode (mode A or mode B) bysetting the tool change arm EC-axis zero offset data and EC-axis positioning point data for points 1to 4 by selecting the system check mode.Positioning point setting procedure

Procedure :

1 Position the tool change arm at the retract position or tool clamp position by using the systemcheck mode.

2 Select the parameter setting mode and display the ATC parameter (EC-axis parameter)screen.

3 Move the cursor to the ZERO OFFSET column and set the EC-axis zero offset data.Set the zero offset data so that the positioning point data of the machine system parameter(EC-axis positioning point) will be as indicated below.

If the tool change arm rotation position is at the EA CLP. POS. B, for example, move the cursorto the ZERO OFFSET column and execute [CAL] + [90] + [WRITE]. The reason for inputting“90” is that EA CLP. POS. B corresponds to 2.POINT.

4 Display the machine system parameter (EC-axis positioning point) screen in the parameter set-ting mode.

5 Set the data as follows.

6 Turn off the power and turn it on again.

CAUTION

1.POINT 0 2.POINT 90000 3.POINT 180000 4.POINT 270000

1.POINT 0 2.POINT 90000 3.POINT 180000 4.POINT 270000

To carry out tool change operation by actually holding a tool by the tool change arm, set the datafor 1.POINT to 4.POINT accurately.To change the arm rotation position data, always contact Okuma Service Center.


9-10. Cam Shaft Timing Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-1)

Set timing of various hydraulic driving controls in relation to the cam shaft angle at ATC sequenceNo. 9, for the parameter as angle data.

Angle of turret tool clamp/unclampPerform the turret tool clamp/unclamp output operation when the commanded angle of the camshaft has entered the following angle range. For the cam shaft angle for clamping/unclamping a tur-ret tool, override is different between automatic/MDI operation and manual operation. Thus preparetwo sets for automatic/MDI operation and manual operation.Clamping/unclamping the turret tool and the cam shaft angle have the following relation:

<<Other than 1-step feed/return>>

• Turret tool clamp output0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool unclamp start angleTurret tool clamp start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

• Turret tool unclamp outputTurret tool unclamp start angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Turret tool clamp start angle

<<Upon 1-step feed/return>>

• Turret tool clamp output0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 60°285° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

• Turret tool unclamp output60° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 285°

Angle of RS air blowOutput RS air blow at the following cam shaft angle.

• RS air blow outputRS air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < RS air blow angle 2

Angle of ATC air blowATC air blow is supplied from the taper shank portion of a turret tool. Air blow is controlled at the fol-lowing cam shaft angles for ATC operations using M codes and all manual ATC operations of 1-cycle or 1-step feed/return.

• ATC air blow outputATC air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < ATC air blow angle 2

Item Initial Value Setting RangeTurret tool clamp start angle 285.000 0 to 359.999Turret tool unclamp start angle 0.000 0 to 359.999

Item Initial Value Setting RangeRS air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999RS air blow angle 2 300.000 0 to 359.999

Item Initial Value Setting RangeATC air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999ATC air blow angle 2 285.000 0 to 359.999


Angle of end face air blowEnd face air blow is supplied from the end face of a turret tool (the portion gripped with the toolchange arm). Air blow is controlled at the following angles of the cam shaft for ATC operations usingM codes and all manual ATC operations of 1-cycle or 1-step feed/return.

• End face air blow outputEnd face air blow angle 1 ≤ Angle of cam shaft < End face air blow angle 2

Cam shaft answer angleThe completion answer of ATC sequence No.9 due to 1-cycle start of automatic operation, MDIoperation, and manual operation is returned when the cam shaft has reached the angle set on thisparameter, and the system goes to the next sequence.

• Answer of ATC sequence No. 9Angle of cam shaft = Cam shaft answer angle

9-11. Step Division Parameter

ATC sequence No. 9 assigns a full rotation of the cam shaft as a sequence step, and controlsreplacement between a turret tool and an RS tool as a series of operation. On the other hand, stepfeed/return proceeding ATC individual operations one by one divides a step at any timing accordingto the purpose. Division is based on the angle of the cam shaft.For this parameter, operate the variable directly in the adjustment mode. No special setup screen isavailable.

• Sequence No.9, first step0° ≤ Angle of cam shaft < First division cam angle

• Sequence No.9, second stepFirst division cam angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < Second division cam angle

• Sequence No.9, third stepSecond division cam angle ≤ Angle of cam shaft < 360°

The following relation is assumed as magnitude relation between first division cam angle and sec-ond division cam angle. First division cam angle < second division cam angle

When the parameter setting is zero, the sequence is not divided. That is, if either parameter is zero,ATC sequence No. 9 is two steps, and if both parameters are zero, the sequence is not divided butthe cam shaft makes a 360° rotation as a series of operation.

Item Initial Value Setting RangeEnd face air blow angle 1 0.000 0 to 359.999End face air blow angle 2 75.000 0 to 359.999

Item Initial Value Setting RangeCam shaft answer angle 345 0 to 359.999

Item Initial Value Setting RangeFirst division cam angle 65.000 0 to 359.999Second division cam angle 295.000 0 to 359.999


9-12. ATC Tool Change Arm (Machine System Parameter No.18-2)

(1) When valid: Motor output torque is limited according to the torque limit value set on the tool change armtorque limit parameter (machine system parameter No.18-3).When invalid: Motor output torque is limited to the maximum output torque specific to the motor (300% of themotor rating).

(2) Set a delay time that begins with entry of confirmation input and lasts until the confirmation inputis valid on the sequence for which clamping/unclamping a turret tool is the operation conditionof ATC.

9-13. Tool Change Arm Torque Limit Parameter (Machine System Parameter No.18-3)

The maximum output torque of the cam shaft motor can be limited by cam angles in order to protectthe tool change arm driving system. These items can be valid by setting the tool change arm torquelimit (machine system parameter No.18-2).

9-14. Tool Change Arm Override 1 (Machine System Parameter No.18-4)

(1) Cam shaft override functionSet override during the cam shaft operation at ATC sequence No. 9, for each operation mode.Set the override value for the machine system parameter.

(2) Cam shaft override enabling conditionYou can select either enabling override at any time in the automatic/MDI operation mode orenabling it only upon a 180° rotation of the large diameter tool and heavy tool and upon extrac-tion/insertion of the EA tool.The angle of the cam shaft upon a 180° rotation of a tool and upon extraction/insertion of a toolranges from 75° to 285°.

Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting UnitTool change arm torque limit invalid 0 0.1 -

Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting UnitTurret tool clamp confirmation timer 50 0 to 1000 1 msecTurret tool unclamp confirmation timer 50 0 to 1000 1 msec

Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting UnitAngle 0 to 360 0.001 degTorque limit value 0 to 100 %

Item Initial Value Setting Range Remarks

Cam shaft override (automatic/MDI) 0 0 to 100 Zero is handled as 100%.

Cam shaft override (manual) 0 0 to 50 Zero is handled as 50%.

Item Initial Value Setting RangeCam shaft override enabling condition Always Always/large diameter and heavy


9-15. Tool Change Arm Override 2, 3 (Machine System Parameter No.18-5, 6)

You can apply override in each operation mode ranging any cam shaft angle.Six points for automatic/MDI operations and four points for manual operation can be set in the rangeof cam shaft angle. Outside the Setting Range of the override value, there is no difference amongautomatic, MDI, and manual operation modes.

Item Initial Value Setting Range Setting Unit Remarks

Start position 0 0 to 359.999 1 degreeEnd position 0 0 to 359.999 1 degree

Override value 0

0 to 100 (man-ual)

50 to 100 (automatic/

MDI)

% Zero is han-dled as 100%.

Valid/invalid Invalid Valid/invalid


10. System CheckWhen operating the ATC units manually at the start-up of the ATC system, for example, operatingthe ATC unit at a normal speed may constitute hazardous situation. For the operation of the ATC insuch cases, pulse handle feed or jog feed is possible.

10-1. System Check Mode Parameters

The desired system check mode is selected using the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER (SYSTEMCHECK MODE) screen in the parameter setting mode.

LE32114R0400400480001

Press the function key [F1] (MENU) and select the required system check item.While the system check mode is selected, the alarm D “4708 ATC system check mode” appears.This operation is effective only in MANUAL mode.

OperationSystem check cancelNC axis IL releaseGA (3) axis P.H. modeEC (4) axis P.H. modeEZ (5) axis P.H. modeEC/EG override effectiveMG axis rapid feed PBEC axis rapid feed PBEZ axis rapid feed PBSequence No. forced changeATC individual operation


(1) System check cancelCancels the system check mode.

(2) NC axis IL releaseUsually, an interlock is set so that the X-/Y-/Z-axis of the A-turret cannot be moved when theATC arm is in the machine. This interlock can be released by selecting this check mode.

(3) GA (3) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the ATC magazine axis (GA axis). In this check mode, pulsehandle operation is disabled for other axes.Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(4) EC (4) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the EC axis (ATC tool change arm rotation axis). In thischeck mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes.Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(5) EZ (5) axis P.H. modeEnables pulse handle operation of the EZ axis (ATC tool change arm advance/retract axis). Inthis check mode, pulse handle operation is disabled for other axes.Selection of the pulse handle magnification ratio is valid.

(6) EC/EG override effectiveMakes rapid feed override (axis feed override switch) valid for manual one cycle of ATC opera-tion and manual 1 step advance/reverse operation.

(7) MG axis rapid feed PBEnables jog feed of the ATC magazine axis using the JOG feed switches [←] and [→].

(8) EC axis rapid feed PBEnables jog feed of the EC axis (ATC tool change arm rotation axis) using the JOG feedswitches [←] and [→].

(9) EZ axis rapid feed PBEnables jog feed of the EZ axis (ATC tool change arm advance/retract axis) using the JOG feedswitches [←] and [→].

(10) ATC SQ. NO change (ATC operation sequence number change)When setting ATC operation sequence numbers at the machine system parameter [ATC] 1.ATC sequence no., select “ATC SEQ. NO. change”.

(11) ATC manual operation (ATC manual operation)To use the ATC individual operation function, select ENABLE at INDIVIDUAL OP.

CAUTIONThe system check mode function is provided to operate the ATC if the ATC fails to operate auto-matically or when adjusting the machine.Therefore, interlock is not set at all and the ATC operates as intended even if the attempted oper-ation does not follow the ATC operation sequence. Pay special attention to interference and oper-ate the ATC very carefully.


10-2. ATC Parameters

The ATC parameters are not operated usually and operating them becomes necessary when recov-ering the ATC operation or initializing the system. Select the “ATC” at the MC SYSTEM PARAME-TER (ATC) screen.

LE32114R0400400490001

(1) ATC SEQUENCE NO.Used for defining an ATC operation sequence number.If a number is set for this parameter, the signals are output as shown in the output logic tableaccording to the specified sequence number. Therefore, the ATC will move suddenly if a param-eter is set inadvertently.Basically, the current ATC status must be checked and the corresponding ATC sequence num-ber should be input.When setting ATC operation sequence numbers at this parameter, it is necessary to select“ATC SEQ. NO. change” on the machine system parameter [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] screen.Once an ATC operation sequence number is changed, [System check mode] is automaticallychanged to the state of [System check cancel]. Therefore, each time you change the ATC oper-ation sequence number successively, select the [ATC SEQ. NO. change] on the [SYSTEMCHECK MODE] screen.rd

(2) ATC A/B MODEDesignates the tool change arm rotation mode.Rotation mode A: 1Rotation mode B: 2To designate the tool change arm rotation mode, select “1” at the MC SYSTEM PARAMETER(SYSTEM CHECK MODE) screen.

(3) Ignore tool change pos. by ATC IL release PBWhen operating the ATC in 1-step advance/reverse mode while pressing the interlock releasebutton at the ATC operation panel, set this parameter valid to disregard the tool change positioncondition from the input conditions indicated in the manual interlock table.


(4) Perform continuous motion by holding STEP PBWhen operating the ATC using the 1 STEP ADVANCE and 1 STEP REVERSE buttons, set thisparameter valid and the ATC operates continuously when the 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEPREVERSE button is kept pressed.

(5) MG index offset with MG panel operationThere are two magazine pot index positions - ATC position and magazine panel position. At theATC position, a tool is exchanged between the magazine pot and the turret, and at the maga-zine panel position, a tool is directly mounted to the magazine pot. The number of pots betweenthe ATC position and the magazine panel position should be set for this parameter.

(6) GA axis overrideSet the override value for the GA axis (magazine rotation axis). The value set for this parameteris always valid.

(7) EC axis overrideSet the override value for the EC axis (tool change arm rotation axis). The value set for thisparameter is always valid.

(8) EZ axis overrideSet the override value for the EZ axis (tool change arm advance/retract axis). The value set forthis parameter is always valid.

(9) Releasing communication error between magazine operation panel and the NCIf an error occurs at the magazine panel and correct communications cannot be established, acommunication error keeps remain. Since the functions other than the magazine panel areoperable, it is possible to enable resetting the communication error until correct communicationis recovered.Put a checkmark at this parameter. The magazine panel communication error can be releasedby resetting the NC.At turning on the power, however, an alarm message is displayed if a communication erroroccurs, disregarding the parameter setting.

(10) Magazine int. cancelIf an error occurs at the magazine panel disabling correct communications while the magazineis operating in the magazine manual operation intervention mode, it becomes impossible tocancel the manual operation intervention mode.In such a case, put a checkmark at this parameter and reset the NC to cancel the manual inter-vention mode.


(11) MG panel communication retry counter

At the occurrence of communication alarm (error information from the NC is other than“0”):Communication alarm control processing is executed if the following is satisfied.Continuous occurrence of communication error ≥ Retry count set for this parameterIn the following case, occurrence of communication error is disregarded and corresponding pro-cessing is not executed.Continuous occurrence of communication error < Retry count set for this parameterThe function executes the alarm processing as indicated below, if it judges the occurrence ofcommunication alarm from the continuous occurrence of communication error.(Continuous occurrence of communication error ≥ Retry count set for this parameter) Displaying the message showing the occurrence of magazine operation panel communicationerror alarm Ignoring the operation of the switches at the magazine operation panel Canceling the magazine rotation/indexing operation initiated by the operation at the magazineoperation panelIf a communication error occurs during manual magazine rotation/indexing using the switchesat the magazine operation panel, it is regarded as the communication alarm disregarding thesetting for this parameter and the processing indicated above is executed.

(12) ATC tool exchange 3STEP disableThis parameter is effective only when the cam type ATC is used.When a checkmark is put at this parameter, the tool change arm performs the following threesteps successively: work extraction, rotation, and work insertion.af1

(13) Tool Unclamp Status Confirmation Timer (MULTUS-B300/B400)When the machine output “Tool Unclamp: ON” and machine input “Tool Unclamp ConfirmationPS: ON” continue for the period set for the tool unclamp status confirmation timer, the controlstatus is set to “Turret Tool Unclamp”.

(14) Tool Clamp Status Confirmation Timer (MULTUS-B300/B400)When the machine output “Tool Unclamp: OFF” and machine input “Tool Unclamp ConfirmationPS: OFF” continue for the period set for the tool clamp status confirmation timer, the control sta-tus is set to “Turret Tool Clamp”.

(15) EZ Axis Torque Limit (MULTUS-B300/B400)To prevent the breakage of the tool change arm, the torque of the EZ axis (motor load factor) isalways monitored and the alarm A activates when the value set for this parameter.

Setting range: 1 to 20Initial value: 3

Setting unit: 0.01 secInitial value: 0 (Setting value 0 → The control status immediately changes to “Turret Tool Unclamp” when the machine input conditions are satisfied.)Setting range: 0 to 1000

Setting unit: 0.01 secInitial value: 0 (Setting value 0 → The control status immediately changes to “Turret Tool Clamp” when the machine input conditions are satisfied.)Setting range: 0 to 1000

Setting unit: %Initial value: 280Setting range: 0 to 500


(16) EA Rotatable Position EZ (MULTUS-B300/B400)The position of the EZ axis exceeds the position set by this parameter while extracting a toolwith the tool change arm, the tool change arm starts rotating and EC axis and EZ axis operateat the same time.

10-3. Manual ATC Operation

If automatic ATC operation is interrupted or if ATC operation cannot be recovered even if the 1STEP ADVANCE/REVERSE buttons are used, it is possible to return the ATC operation sequenceto the initial state by operating the ATC manually.The manual ATC operation function is provided for this purpose. In manual operation of the ATC,however, each operation step can be executed without confirming the signal input status, meaningthat interlock is not set.

Manual ATC Operation ModeTo enter the manual ATC operation mode, conditions indicated below must be satisfied.

• Manual operation mode

• ATC cycle is not being executed.

• Machine lock function is not ON.

• Magazine panel manual intervention mode is not ON.

• Alarm A is not occurring.

• Manual tool mounting/removal request is not given.

• The NC is not in the power save mode.

Procedure for entering the manual ATC operation mode:

Procedure :

1 Select the parameter set mode.

2 Display the machine system parameter [SYSTEM CHECK MODE] by pressing the function key[ITEM] or [DISPLAY CHANGE].

3 Select [ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION] in the system check mode.

4 Select the manual operation mode.

5 Select [ATC CONDITION DISPLAY] by pressing the [DISPLAY CHANGE].

6 Press the PAGE key to display the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.

Setting unit:0.001 mmInitial value:4250Setting range:0 to value set for EZ axis positioning point 2


Manual ATC Operation ScreenWhen the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION mode is selected, the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen(Page 2) described in 8-1 is changed to the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.h

LE32114R0400400500001

The items displayed at this screen are the same as the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen. At theATC MANUAL OPERATION screen, however, the following items are additionally displayed.

(1) INDIVIDUAL OPWhen the individual operation is enabled, the cursor can move to the checkbox for each of theindividual operation items, allowing you to select required individual operations.

(2) INDIV. OP. CANCELTo return the ATC to the previous ATC operating conditions from the individual operation modeafter completing individual operations. However, there is no need to recover the previous ATCconditions such as operation checks of ATC components or initial settings or it is impossible toreturn to the previous ATC conditions, select ENABLE at INDIV. OP. CANCEL.

(3) Reverse display of individual operation itemsThe current ATC status is identified by the reverse display of operation items at ATC SEQ. NO.on the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen.000


Operating the ATC Manually

CAUTION

Procedure :

1 Select the ATC individual operation mode.

2 Locate the cursor at INDIVIDUAL OP. on the ATC INDIVIDUAL OPERATION screen and selectENABLE.

3 Move the cursor to the checkbox of the required ATC individual operation items.

4 Put a checkmark at required ATC individual operation items using the MENU function.You cannot remove the checkmarks from the presently checked items. The check mark will dis-appear when you put a checkmark at the contradicting individual operation item. The contra-dicting individual operation items cannot be selected at the same time, but the several itemsindifferent to each other can be selected simultaneously.

5 To execute the individual operation items where checkmarks are put, press the INTERLOCKRELEASE button and 1 CYCLE START button at the same time on the ATC operation panel.

Forced Canceling of Manual ATC Operation Mode

CAUTION

The procedure after entering the manual ATC operation mode is described below.

Procedure :

1 At the ATC MANUAL OPERATION screen, move the cursor to the MAN. OP. CANCEL item.

2 Select ENABLE at INDIV. OP. CANCEL using the [MENU] key.The INTERLOCK RELEASE and 1 CYCLE START buttons at the ATC operation panel startblinking.

3 Press the INTERLOCK RELEASE and the 1 CYCLE START button, at the ATC operationpanel, simultaneously. Operation steps highlighted at the ATC MANUAL OPERATION screenare executed at the timing the buttons are released.

Since manual ATC operation function is provided to operate the ATC when automatic ATC opera-tion is disabled, interlock is not taken when operating the ATC manually. Therefore, operate theATC very carefully paying attention to interference.

The MAN. OP. CANCEL function is provided to forcibly exit the manual ATC operation mode.After exiting the manual ATC operation mode forcibly, the ATC operates so that the status beforethe entry to the manual ATC operation mode is restored. In other words, the ATC operates so thatthe status indicated by the highlighting operation step items at the ATC MANUAL OPERATIONscreen are restored. Note that ATC operation to restore the previous status is performed withoutinterlock.


11. Others

11-1. G and M Code Macro Functions

(1) G Code Macro FunctionCALL, MODIN and MODOUT statements, provided by the user task 2 specification (optionalspecification), can be specified by G code commands of the G code macro function.A G code macro command must always be specified in a block without other commands andonly a sequence number may be specified before a G code.A G, S, T, and/or M code is disregarded if it is specified with a G code macro command in thesame block.Note that G171 (positioning at the tool change position), an ATC macro command, is a G codemacro command and one block of commands “G171 ATP=?” designates a series of operationof turret rotation to the ATC position, shutter open/close and positioning at the tool change posi-tion.

a. G224Cancels the MODIN statement, in the same manner as the MODOUT statement.Command format: G224

b. G161 to G171Just as with the MODIN statement, these G code commands remain valid until G224(MODOUT statement) is executed. These G codes automatically call and execute the sub-program set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axis move-ment command.Command format:G161 <Q_> <Variable setting>Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed. If omitted, it indicates “1”.Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.

c. G171For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of“positioning to the ATC position”.As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OG171 in the maker sub-program file.Command format:G171 <Variable setting>Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram. ATP is set for G171.

d. G205 to G214Just as with the CALL statement, these G code commands automatically call and executethe subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axismovement command.Command format:G205 <Q_> <Variable setting>Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed. If omitted, it indicates “1”.Variable setting: Sets the variables used in the called subprogram.


(2) M Code Macro FunctionCALL statement, provided by the user task 2 specification (optional specification), can be spec-ified by an M code command of the M code macro function.An M code macro command must always be specified in a block without other commands andonly a sequence number may be specified before an M code.A G, S, T, and/or M code is disregarded if it is specified with an M code macro command in thesame block.Note that M421/M422 (positioning at the tool change position/tool change), an ATC macro com-mand, is an M code macro command and one block of M code command “M421/M422” desig-nates a series of operation of turret rotation to the ATC position, shutter open/close andpositioning at the tool change position.

a. M421For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of“positioning to the ATC position/tool change/positioning to the return position”.As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OM421 in the maker sub-program file. Command format: M421

b. M422For the machine equipped with the ATC, this is interpreted as the ATC macro command of“positioning to the ATC position/tool change”.As with the CALL statement, it calls and executes subprogram OM422 in the maker sub-program file. Command format: M422

c. M441 to M460Just as with the CALL statement, these M code commands automatically call and executethe subprogram set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen at each execution of an axismovement command. Command format: M441 <Q_> Q: Designates the number of times the called subprogram is executed. If omitted, it indicates “1”.

(3) Subprogram Name SettingThe subprogram name of the subprograms to be called by the G/M code macro command is setat the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen. A subprogram name must consist of five alphanu-meric characters beginning with character O.An error occurs if a subprogram name is not set for the subprogram that will be called by a G orM code macro command. An error also occurs if the subprogram, selected in automatic mode,does not exist at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen.Conversely, if a subprogram name set at the G-CODE/M-CODE MACRO screen is changedafter that subprogram is selected, and if the changed subprogram is not selected, the followingalarm occurs at the execution of a G code macro command or an M code macro command. Alarm B 2280 SUB PROGRAM program name


11-2. ATC Macro Command Subprograms

11-2-1. Called Subprograms

The ATC macro commands (G171, M421, M422) have the same function as the CALL statement. G171 → Calls subprogram OG171. M421 → Calls subprogram OM421. M422 → Calls subprogram OM422.

11-2-2. Subprogram Specifications

The list and flowchart of ATC macro commands (G171, M421, M422) are sown below.Subprograms of the individual ATC macro commands are stored in the maker subprogram file or themaker library program file (LKSI300?.MSB or LMSI300?.LIB ?: revision-name).

System Common Variables and System Variables

VS07 ATP commandVS08 AHP command value/HP command value of G21VS09 Turret number of MT commandVS10 Tool number of the tool presently mounted in the turret which is specified by the MT

command turret numberVS12 Work variableVSATC ATC specificationVRSTT RestartVMTTR Turret number specified by MT commandVYMOD Y-axis control modeVKND Long toolVMLCK Machine lockVAPAX Actual position of X-axis (machine coordinate system)VPVLX Variable limit of X-axis in the positive directionVTIDA Turret indexing to the ATC positionVSIOX X-axis command value (program coordinate system)VZOFX X-axis zero offsetVZSHX X-axis zero shiftVETFX Presently used X–axis offsetVMTTL Tool number specified by MT commandVTSPC Turret specification tableVTTLN[*] Tool number of tool mounted in turret station *

VTSPC bit7:Face toolbit6:Side toolbit5:Sensor toolbit4:L-toolbit3:M-tool bit2:Emptybit1:Emptybit0:ATC not possible


List and Flowchart

LE32114R0400400530001

OG171 OM422

OHPPD

OM421

NOEX SATC=VSATCIF AHP NN6IF ATP NN1GOTO NATPNN1 VS07=ATPIF [VS07 LT 1] NATPIF [VS07 GT 12] NATPCALL OHPPDIF [VS08 NE 0] NN5NATP VUACM [1] = 'ATP'GOTO NALMNN5 TC=VS07GOTO NN6ANN6 IF [AHP LT 1] NAHPIF[AHP GT 5] NAHPVS08=AHPNN6A IF [SATC GE 1] NN7M205NN7 IF [VRSTT NE 0] NN8IF [VYMOD EQ 128] NN8NN7A G138NN8 G21 HP=VS08IF [VS08 LT 4] NRTSG136IF [ [VKND1 [1] AND 4] EQ 4] NRTSIF [SATC GE 1] NRTSM204GOTO NRTSNAHP VUACM [1] = 'AHP'NALM NOEX VDOUT [992] =0NRTS RTS

CALL OCHMTVS07=VMTTRIF [VRSTT NE 0] NN3IF [VMLCK NE 0] NN3VS10=VTTLN [VS07]IF [VMTTL EQ 0] NN1IF [VS10 EQ VMTTL] NRTSNN1 VS12=VSIOXIF [VYMOD NE 128] NN1AVS12=VS12 2NN1A VS12=VS12+VZOFX+VZSHX+VETFX-VPVLXIF [VS12 GE -1] NN2IF [VTIDA EQ 128] NN2TC=VS07NN2 CALL OHPPDG21 HP=VS08MT=VMTTR+VMTTL 100NN3 TC=VS07 M06NRTS RTS

VS08=1IF [ [VTSPC [VS07] AND 16] EQ 16] NRTSVS08=2IF [ [VTSPC [VS07] AND 136] EQ 136] NRTSVS08=3IF [ [VTSPC [VS07] AND 72] EQ 72] NRTSVS08=0NRTS RTS

OCHMTIF [MT NE 0] NRTSVUACM [1] = 'MT'VDOUT [992] =0NRTS RTS

CALL OCHMTVS09=VMTTRIF [VRSTT NE 0] NN10IF [VMLCK NE 0] NN10MT=VMTTR+VMTTL 100VS10=VTTLN [VS09]IF [VMTTL EQ 0] NN1IF [VS10 EQ VMTTL] NRTSNN1 VS12=VAPAX-VPVLXIF [VS12 GE -1] NN2IF [VTIDA EQ 128] NN2IF [VYMOD NE 128] N421NN2 G171 ATP=VS09M06G171 AHP=4GOTO NN11NN10 TC=VS09M06NN11 IF [VSATC GE 1] NN12GOTO NRTSNN12 IF [ [VDIN [1255] AND 16] EQ 16] NN13T=VS09 100GOTO NRTSNN13 T=VS09 1000GOTO NRTSN421 VUACM [1] = 'M421'VDOUT [992] =0NRTS RTS


LE32114R0400400530002

OG171

SATC = VSATC

AHP ? 1 AHP 5

VS08 = AHP

VS08 < 4

G136

VKND[1]AND 4= 4

SATC 1

M204

RTS

VUACM[1]= 'AHP'

VDOUT[992]=0

ATP ?

VS07=ATP

1 VS07 12

OHPPD

VS08 0

TC = VS07

SATC 1

M205

VRSTT 0

VYMOD=1

G138

2A

G21 HP=VS08

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NN1

NN5

NN6A

NN7

NN7A

NN8

NN6AHP command existing?

ATP command existing?

Determining the HPcommand

Indexing the turretto the ATC position

Openingthe shutter

Restarting?

In Y-axis controlmode?

Y-axis controlmode ON

Moving to the toolchange position

Macturn-ATC

VSATC 1:Macturn302:Macturn50

YES

NAHP

VUACM[1]='ATP'NATP

NO

YES

YES

YES

NALM

1A

2A

NO

NO

NO

HP=1,2,3

NRTS

Y-axis controlmode OFF

Closing theshutter

T1:Long tool

MacTurn-ATC

1A


LE32114R0400400530003

1

VDIN[1255] AND 16 = 16

T = VS09 * 1000T = VS09 * 100

NN1 1 NO

YES NN12 NO

YES

Checking the MT command value

Turret number of the MT commandRestarting?

Machine lock ON?

MT command

Tool number of the tool to be mounted to the turret number specified by MT command

MT command tool number = 0?

Is MT command tool number = Tool number of the tool presently mounted in the turret?

X-axis y Variable limit in the positive direction?

Turret indexed to the ATC position?

Y-axis mode not ON?

Positioning to the tool change position

Tool change

ATC Specification

Tool data 200 sets

NN12

NN13

return position

Turret indexing

Tool change

200 pairs?

Alarm BUser reserve code

MacTurn ATC?


LE32114R0400400530004

OM422

OCHMT

VS07=VMTTR

VRSTT 0

VMLCK 0

VS10=VTTLN[VS07]

VMTTL=0

VS10=VMTTL

VS12=VSIOX

VYMOD 128

VS12=VS12 2

VS12 =VS12+VZOFX+VZSHX+VETFX-VPVLX

VS12 -1

VT1DA=128

TC=VS07

OHPPD

G21 HP=VS08

MT=VMTTR+VMTTL 100

TC=VS07 M06

RTS

NRTS

NN1A

NN3

NN2

NN1

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

Checking the MT command value

Turret number of the MT command

Restarting?

Machine lock ON?

MT command tool number = 0?

Y-axis mode ON?

Tool number of the tool to bemounted to the turret numberspecified by MT command

Is MT command toolnumber = Tool numberof the tool presentlymounted in the turret?

X-axis y Variable limit in the positivedirection?

Home position point data

Moving to the home position

Indexing the turret to the ATC positionTool change

Turret number of the MT command

Turret indexed to theATC position?

MT command


LE32114R0400400530005

OHPPD

VS08=1

VTSPC[VS07] AND 16=16

VS06=2


VS06=3


VS08=0

RTS

OCHMT

MT 0

VUACM[1]= 'MT'

VUOUT[992]=0

RTS

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NRTS

NRTS

L-tool turret?

Face M-tool turret?

Side M-tool turret?

MT command value 0?


11-3. Optical In–process Workpiece Gauging Specification (Optional Specification)

The NC lathe with ATC of the optical in-process workpiece gauging specification (optional specifica-tion) uses the sensor of the in-process workpiece gauging specification (optional specification) bymounting it from the magazine to the turret by the ATC. An optical sensor that transmits the touchsignal by infrared ray is used.

[Supplement]

(1) Added CommandsM270...........Sensor ON commandThe optical sensor operates using a built-in battery. Taking into consideration the battery life,gauging cycle is executed only after turning on the optical sensor by the M270 command.M269...........Sensor OFF commandThe command turns off the optical sensor.M270/M269 commands are specified in the “in-process gauging MSB file” prepared by Okuma.Accordingly, it is not necessary to specify M270/M269 in a user’s program when the gaugingfunction is called by the gauging subprogram prepared by Okuma.TL = ** ...........Turret indexing to the cutting position command (TL= *** )OSP receives the sensor’s touch signal in the state the sensor is indexed to the cutting position.When the sensor is not indexed to the cutting position, the sensor signal input is disabled andOSP does not recognize the sensor’s touch signal even if it is input.

(2) Sensor Status CheckOSP checks the status of the optical sensor and an alarm occurs if the sensor ON command(M270) or the gauging cycle command (G30) is executed while battery voltage is low or whenthe sensor is in an error status.

(3) Gauging RangeSince an optical sensor is used, gauging is not possible if the signal transmitted by infrared rayfrom the sensor cannot be received by the receiver mounted in the CNC. Therefore, gaugingmust be carried out in the range where signal transmission between the sensor and the receiveris possible.

The optical in-process workpiece gauging specification executes the same gauging function pro-vided by the workpiece gauging specification as the optional specification using the optical sensorthat can be handled by the ATC. Therefore, only operation specific to the optical in-process work-piece gauging specification is described below. For details of the sensor operation and gaugingprogram, refer to the [GAUGING SYSTEM INSTRUCTION MANUAL].


11-4. At the Occurrence of ATC Failure

The explanation given below shows the information useful to minimize machine down time at theoccurrence of a trouble with the ATC.

11-4-1. Outline of ATC Control

For the operation of the ATC, a servomotor is used for magazine rotation, tool change arm rotationand advance/retract and hydraulic power is used for other ATC operation.ATC operation is performed by changing over the hydraulic circuit using solenoid valves and opera-tion status of the ATC is confirmed by limit switches, proximity switches, auto-switches, etc.In other words, the ATC controller recognizes the ATC status by the status of the signals input fromthe switches and sensors and outputs the commands to the solenoid valves and servomotorsaccording to the input signals to operate the ATC.

11-4-2. Logic Tables

To operate the ATC, the controller operates the magazine, the tool change arm and other ATC unitsstep by step to change tools.A tool change cycle is divided into operation steps and solenoid valve operation is controlled to real-ize the individual steps. The signals to be output to achieve these individual steps are summarizedin the table form as the output logic table.Meanwhile, the controller cannot confirm if the ATC units have actually operated as instructed by theoutput signals if only outputs are sent to the solenoid valves. The controller judges whether the oper-ation step for which it has output the signals has been completed from the signals input from the cor-responding limit switches. The input logic table shows the signals that must be input for each step.In addition to the input and output logic tables, the manual interlock table is provided to show thestatus of confirmation input signals for each step to be used for manual one step advance/reverseoperation. This table shows the signals that must be confirmed for judging the completion of ATCstep.To understand the ATC operation, an operator is required to understand the input logic table, theoutput logic table and the manual interlock table.

(1) Reading the Output Logic TableThe output logic table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Output Logic Tables”.Operation steps of the ATC are arranged vertically and the solenoid valves and operation com-mand names used to operate the ATC are arranged horizontally in the title column. The statusof the outputs can be checked at the CHECK DATA screen.Reading the table:Solenoid output statuses (ON/OFF) required to perform each ATC operation sequence (step)are indicated in the table. In the table “ ” represents “ON” and blank represents “OFF”.

(2) Reading the Input Logic Table and the Manual Interlock TableThe input logic table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Input Logic Tables” and the manualinterlock table is provided in “ATC Logic Tables”, “Manual Interlock Tables”.As with the output logic table, ATC operation steps are arranged vertically in the table with theinput conditions necessary to complete the each step arranged horizontally. The status of theinputs can also be checked at the CHECK DATA screen.Reading the table:The ON/OFF status of the confirmation input signals, required for the completion of the ATCoperation sequence (step), are shown in the table. In the table “ ” represents “ON” and blankrepresents “OFF”.


11-4-3. If the ATC Fails to Operate

If the ATC fails to operate in response to manual ATC operation or ATC operation commands, thecause is probably one of the following:

(1) When manual ATC operation is attempted (other than 1 step advance and 1 step reverse oper-ation), the actual ATC sequence number differs from the ATC sequence number in which theattempted step can be executed.

(2) When an ATC command is given, the actual ATC sequence number differs from the ATCsequence number in which the attempted step can be executed.

(3) When an ATC command is given, the ATC confirmation input signal status differs from the inputsignal status that allows the execution of the attempted ATC operation command, shown in theinput logic table.

(4) When an ATC command is given, the ATC confirmation input signal status differs from the inputsignal status that allows the execution of the attempted ATC operation command, shown in theinput logic table.

(5) The confirmation input signals are not input correctly due to a problem with the proximityswitches/limit switches (operation failure due to misalignment of the mechanical parts, improperadjustments, damage, cable breakage, etc.) or due to blockage in the hydraulic piping, whichmeans that the input conditions shown in the input logic table are not satisfied and thus comple-tion of ATC operation sequence cannot be confirmed.

If the ATC Operation Sequence Number is IncorrectIf the ATC fails to operate due to incorrect ATC operation sequence number, as with cases (1) and(2) above, such a problem often occurs when operating the ATC in the manner as shown below.

• Operating the ATC automatically using the ATC command by interrupting manual ATC opera-tion (1 step advance, 1 step reverse).

• Recovering the ATC after interrupting the ATC operation by pressing the reset button.

• Recovering the ATC after interrupting the ATC operation by pressing the emergency stop buttonand resetting the emergency stop state by pressing the reset button.

When operating the ATC manually or executing an ATC command, the ATC operation sequencenumber at which the specific operation/command is allowed is predetermined (refer to 4-2. “ManualATC Operation” and 5. “ATC Program Commands”).Therefore, the ATC does not operate if manual operation is attempted or an ATC command is exe-cuted in a wrong ATC operation sequence number.In the case of (1), the attempted manual operation is disregarded and in the case of (2) an alarmoccurs.


Recovering the interrupted operation:

Procedure :

1 Display the ATC CONDITION DISPLAY screen and check the sequence number at the ATCSEQ. NO. item.

2 Check the correct ATC operation sequence number by referring to 4-2. “Manual ATC Opera-tion” and 5. “ATC Program Commands”.

3 Advance or return the ATC operation sequence number by manually operating the ATC usingthe 1-step advance/1-step reverse buttons to set the ATC in the correct ATC operationsequence number.While the indicating lamp (LED) of the 1 STEP ADVANCE or 1 STEP REVERSE button lights,it indicates that 1 step advance/1 step reverse operation is permitted. Execute 1 step advance/reverse as instructed by the lighting of the indicating lamp (LED).

4 This completes the recovery of the ATC. Perform the desired manual ATC operation or auto-matic ATC operation.If the ATC operation cannot be recovered by following the steps indicated above, it indicatesthat the ATC confirmation input signals differ from the input conditions indicated in the inputlogic table.

If the ATC Confirmation Input Signals Differ from the Input Condition Specified in theInput Logic TableProvided the ATC is used normally, it will be possible to recover the operation by following the stepsdescribed in (1) above. However, if for some reason the ATC confirmation input signal statusbecomes different from the input condition indicated in the input logic table, it will not be possible torecover the ATC by using manual ATC operation.

(1) If manual ATC operation is impossibleIf manual ATC operation is not possible, the conditions not satisfied are displayed a theMACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen.

(2) If ATC commands (MT, M06, etc.) cannot be executedWhen an ATC command is executed, the controller outputs the signals to the solenoid valvesaccording to the present ATC sequence as indicated in the output logic table. If the operationconfirmation signal is not input within the specified length of time (120 s), an alarm occurs(Alarm C 3734 M-axis clutch connection error).At the occurrence of the alarm, the items for which the confirmation input signal has not beeninput correctly are displayed at the MACHINE DIAGNOSIS screen.That is, the controller compares the current input signal status with the status shown in the inputlogic table and the following items are displayed as the message at the MACHINE DIAGNOSISscreen. An item for which the input is OFF although it should be ON. An item for which the input is ON although it should be OFF.Confirm the items for which the actual input status differs from the status indicated in the inputlogic table, display the CHECK DATA screen and confirm the current input status.

As the result of confirmation, if there are items for which the input signal status differs from the sta-tus indicated in the input logic table although the signals are output corresponding to the presentATC operation sequence number indicated in the output logic table, it indicates that the machine willbe faulty. In this case, contact your nearest Okuma Service Center.

5262-E P-112SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

SECTION 3 Y-AXIS CONTROL

1. OUTLINE Y-AXIS CONTROL

1-1. OVERVIEW

This manual describes the Y-axis controlled lathe, which has been developed by adding Y-axis con-trol mechanism to a general multifunction lathe.Equipped with the Y-axis control, more complicated shape can be machined in only single setup. Touse the Y-axis control lathe more profitably, use this manual as a NOTICE to the standard OSPoperation manual and to the programming manual.

[Features of Y-axis controlling OSP]

(1) Compound fixed cycles are possible at a position offset in Y-axis direction.

(2) Y-axis control program can be created in the same way as programming for standard lathe.

(3) If you cancel the Y-axis control, the Y-axis unit automatically returns to the turning position.

LE32114R0400500010001


2. OPERATION

2-1. MACHINE OPERATION

2-1-1. Basic Layout of Operation Panels

Panels related to the machine operation are classified as indicated below:

(1) NC operation panelThe NC operation panel is used to operate the NC except for manual operation. This panel can be used to make operations, such as file operation and data setting.

(2) Machine panelThe machine panel has the switches mainly used for manual operation.

(3) Option panelThe option panel is provided with the switches and lamps required for optionally selected func-tions. The arrangement of the switches or lamps on the panel varies depending on the selectedoptional functions.

(4) B-type panelUnlike the above three panels, the B-type panel does not exist on the panel.The operation buttons appear on the pop-up window by pressing the “FUNCTION SELCTION”button on the panel.

2-1-2. Optional Panel for Y-axis Control Function

Operation Screen

LE32114R0400500030001


Operation PanelAlthough the FUNCTION SELECTION key and Y-AXIS OPERATION key are arranged on the samepanel in the standard specification, these keys are provided on separate panels.

• Normal Specification

LE32114R0400500030002

• Sub-spindle Specification

LE32114R0400500030003

LE32114R0400500030004


2-1-3. Brief Description of Switches and Operation Screens

(1) FUNCTION SELECTION keyPress this key on the additional panel to display the pop-up operation screen. The Y-axis modecan be selected and canceled and manual operation for Y-axis restoration can be executed onthe displayed screen.

LE32114R0400500040001

(2) Y-AXIS OPERATION keyThis button is for JOG feed or Y-axis in the manual operation. This is valid only while you keeppressing the button. The override dial on the machine is usable for the Y-axis feed like the otherfeed axis.

LE32114R0400500040002

(3) PULSE HANDLEY-axis movement is enabled when the X/Z/Y/W switch is positioned to Y. Multiplication of feed-ing is the same as of the X/Z axis switch.

(4) Y-AXIS MODE ONHis key can be used to select Y-axis mode and cancel Y-axis control mode in manual operationmode. When selecting the Y-axis control mode, the spindle must be set to C-axis connection.When canceling the Y-axis control, the tool edge position in the Y-axis direction must bereturned to the turning position (refer to (5) “Y-AXIS RETURN”.)

LE32114R0400500040003

(5) Y-AXIS RETURNWhen canceling the Y-axis mode and executing the normal turning, the tool edge (centerheight) must be positioned in the center of the spindle. Since it is hard to restore the Y-axis tothe turning position in manual mode, this Y-AXIS RETURN button is used. Although the Y-axisreturns to the turning position while this button is pressed, the Y-axis stops moving when thisbutton in released. The axial movement is not executed after the Y-axis was returned to theturning position.

LE32114R0400500040004


2-2. MANUAL OPERATION

2-2-1. Axis Movement (Y-axis)

There are following two ways to move the Y-axis.

• JOG feed key

• PULSE HANDLE

JOG Feed Key

Procedure :

1 Select MANUAL on the NC operation panel.

2 Press the FUNCTION SELECTION key on the optional panel to open the multifunction machin-ing operation window and [F3] (Y-AXIS MODE ON). The machine enters the Y-axis controlmode.

3 Press Y-axis operation or key on the option panel to move the Y-axis.

[Supplement]

• Selected axis can move while you keep pressing JOG feed key.• Even if the Y-axis moving range is within the range set in the parameters, the Y-axis cannot

move to the variable limit position depending on the X-axis position. In this case, the limit lamplights ON.

• With the OVERRIDE switch on the machine panel, you can change feed speed.


PULSE HANDLE

Procedure :

1 Select MANUAL on the NC operation panel.

2 Press the FUNCTION SELECTION key on the optional panel to open the multifunction machin-ing operation window and [F3] (Y-AXIS MODE ON). The machine enters the Y-axis controlmode.

3 Select the Y-axis by using the PULSE HANDLE on the optional panel or AXIS SELCTION SWon the portable pulse handle unit.

4 Set the axis increment (feed per pulse) of PULSE HANDLE with the PULSE HANDLE multipli-cation switch on the machine panel.

5 Turn the handle of the hand pulse generator. If you turn in the right, the axis moves in positivedirection of the program coordinate and if left, negative direction.

[Supplement]

• You cannot select two axes at a time when you use the PULSE HANDLE.• Refer to the following table for feed amount per 1 pulse.

Linear feeding axis Rotary feeding axisMetric unit system inch unit system degree unit system

1/1 0.001 mm/pulse 0.0001 inch/pulse 0.001 deg/pulse10/1 0.010 mm/pulse 0.0010 inch/pulse 0.010 deg/pulse50/1 0.050 mm/pulse 0.0050 inch/pulse 0.050 deg/pulse


2-3. MDI OPERATION

2-3-1. Y-axis Commands

When executing the Y-axis commands in the MDI operation, select the Y-axis control mode. Themethod for execution of the other commands is the same as of the standard machine.

(1) Selecting the Y-axis control mode.

• Select the MDI operation mode.

• Set the machine to the C-axis control mode.

• Execute the Y-axis control mode ON command (G138).

(2) Canceling the Y-axis control mode.

• Execute the Y-axis control OFF command (G136).

2-4. AUTOMATIC OPERATION

The automatic operation method of the Y-axis controlled lathe is the same with that of the standardmachines. For the automatic operation method, therefore, refer to the OSP Operation Manual.This manual describes only the automatic operations peculiar to the Y-axis controlled lathe.

2-4-1. Sequence Return

The sequence return operation procedure for the Y-axis machine is basically the same as of thestandard machine.When you operate the machine, however, be careful of the following notes.Execute the sequence return under condition that command status in the program block to executethe sequence return should match with the actual machine status.Typical matching status

• C-axis connected status

• Tool turret indexing

• Valid or invalid of the Y-axis control mode

We recommend executing the sequence return with the axis positioned near the coordinate valuescommanded in the program.

2-4-2. Program Restart

When you restart the program, you can execute operation in the same way as of the standard restartoperation, however, take extremely caution for the operation.Without regarding to the Y-axis control mode of the recovered machine, the machine executes com-mands of the program block to start. Therefore, if the restarting block and the spindle mode actuallyselected is not identical, the machine operates unexpectedly. If you attempt to restart the program,be sure to match the Y-axis control status of the block to start with the Y-axis control status of themachine.


2-5. NC OPERATION PANEL DISPLAY

2-5-1. Screens

Select the ACTUAL POSITION screen and then MAIN PROGRAM screen. Next, use the PAGE keyto display the screen shown below.While the NC is in the Y-axis control mode, the actual position data appears also in the columns forYI and XI axes. If the Y-axis control mode is not selected, asterisks appear on the YI and XI col-umns.

• Y-axis control mode ON

LE32114R0400500120001

• Y-axis control mode OFF

LE32114R0400500120002


• Actual position display screen

LE32114R0400500120003

LE32114R0400500120004


2-6. ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

2-6-1. Interlock against Axis Movement

In the Y-axis control mode, the X-axis commands are given with radius values, while the commandsare given with the diameter value in the turning mode. This is because the axis commands in the Y-axis control mode are issued imaging the 3dimension space.The Y-axis control mode remains effective even after the NC is reset or the power is turned ON orOFF.When program operation is executed in Y-axis control mode, the NC judges the specified diametercommand as a radius one. To prevent such misjudgment, the NC generates an alarm if G138 orG136 (Y-axis control ON or OFF) is not specified before axis movement when the program operationis started in Y-axis control mode.

2-6-2. Interlock against Turret Rotation

The turret can be rotated when the actual X coordinate is equal to or larger than the variable limit.

2-6-3. SYSTEM VARIABLES

2-6-4. LOAD MONITOR (OPTIONAL)

If the lathe is provided with the load monitor function, the load applied to the Y-axis can also be mon-itored. In this case, the load monitor function monitors the load applied to the existing YS-axis.Axis number to be monitored 128 Y-axis monitor ON<Part number setting example>To monitor the loads applied to X- and Y-axesVLMON [1] = 2 + 128

LE32114R0400500160001

<Others>Whether the load monitor function is ignored or not during rapid traverse of Y-axis can be determineby specifying M215/M216.For the fundamental usage of the load monitor function, refer to Special Functions Manual No. 2.

VZOFY ............. YI-axis zero offsetVZSHY ............. YI-axis zero shiftVZOF [*] ............. YI-axis tool offsetVPVLY ............. YI-axis positive variable limitVNVLY ............. YI-axis negative variable limitVINPY ............. YI-axis droop valueVPFVY [*] ............. YI-axis pitch error compensationVPCHY ............. YI-axis pitch amountVSKPY [*] ............. YI-axis sensor touch positionVSIOY ............. Y-axis actual position in program coordinatesVETFY ............. Active. Y-axis tool offset amountVNSRY [*] ............. Y-axis cutter radius compensation

7 6 5 4 3 2 2 0

Y S b W M S C Z X


2-6-5. Y-AXIS DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

In the program operation mode, this data transfer function permits transfer of Y-axis related data;that is, zero point data, tool data, and parameter data. This function is also used to store various setdata in the memory or a floppy disk.For the operation procedure, refer to OSP Operation Manual.

Set Data Input/Output Format

• File name[Character string [max. 256 characters starting with an alphabet] beginning with an alphabeticcharacter].TOP The default name is “A. TOP”.

See Appendix for the list of data formats.

2-6-6. Tow-along Tailstock Control in Y-axis Control Mode

The tow-along tailstock cannot be connected nor moved in Y-axis control mode. If such a commandis issued in Y-axis control mode and in MANUAL mode, the NC ignores the command. If issued inAUTO or MDI mode, the NC generates an alarm.White the tailstock is connected, the Y-axis control mode cannot be established. If the Y-axis controlmode ON command is issued in MANUAL mode with the tailstock connected, the NC ignores thecommand. If issued in AUTO or MDI mode, the NC generates an alarm.


2-6-7. Y-axis Home Position Command (Optional)

When the control unit is provided with both the Y-axis control function and the home position func-tion, the home position command can be given to the three axes; X, Y, and Z.Program command

G20 HP = ? (? = 1 to 8)

Before using the Y-axis home position function, set the home positions at the relevant parameters.<With Y-axis control mode ON>The axes are positioned, at the rapid feedrate, to the machine coordinates of X-, Z-, and YS-axesset at the parameters.Even in axis movements by the home position command, X- and Y-axes are moved by linear inter-polation.<With Y-axis control mode OFF>When the Y-axis control mode is OFF, the YS-axis data set at the parameter is ignored and only X-and Z-axes move to the parameter-set positions.

Home Positioning Over the Variable Limit

The home position function normally carries out axis movements within the variable limit range.However, by designating the M code for canceling the limits, axis movement is possible over thevariable limit within the stroke end limits.

M273 Home positioning is possible within the stroke end limit range.M274 Home positioning is possible within the variable limit range.

[Supplement]

Whether M273/M274 is designated or not, M274 becomes effective with the power ON or NCreset.For the axis positioned outside the variable limit after M273 command is given during programoperation, the axis movement by manual interrupt is ignored.


2-6-8. Y-AXIS CONTROL ON 2-SPINDLE LATHE

This section provides supplementary explanation about the Y-axis control function peculiar to facing2-spindle lathes.

Y-axis Mirror Image Function

The facing 2-spindle lathe uses the program coordinate systems shown in the figure below for R andL spindles. As can be seen from the figure, the Y-axis direction of L spindle is inverse to that of Rspindle, which may be confusing to the operator. To solve this problem, use the mirror image func-tion. This function, like the Z-axis mirror image function, inverts the Y-axis direction of the programcoordinate system according to the data set at the relevant parameter bit.

Basic coordinate system

LE32114R0400500230001

Mirror image coordinate system

LE32114R0400500230002

<Parameter >

• Selecting the Y-axis mirror image coordinate system for L spindleOPTIONAL PARAMETER (1st-2nd SPINDLE) 1st spindle mirror image select (Y)do not: Basic coordinate system is selected.select: Mirror image coordinate system is selected.

• Selecting the Y-axis mirror image coordinate system for R spindle OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1st-2nd SPINDLE) 2nd spindle mirror image select (Y)do not: Basic coordinate system is selected.select: Mirror image coordinate system is selected.

+Z

+X

+Y

+Z

+X

+Y

+Z

+X+Y

+Z

+X

Y+


[Supplement]

LE32114R0400500230003

Coordinate System Selection

Specify ether basic coordinate system or mirror image coordinate system for each spindle at the be-ginning of a part program. An alarm occurs if the coordinate system selected by the program doesnot match the coordinate system selected by the parameter.Selecting basic coordinate system G62 Y0Selecting mirror image coordinate system G62 Y1G62 makes the NC check the part program with the above mirror image parameter data for safeoperation. However, omission of this command will not result in any alarm.

Others

Spindle mode cannot be changed in the Y-axis control mode.

The above optional parameter bit data becomes effective by turning on the power. After changingthe parameter data, back up the data, turn off the power, and turn on the power.


2-6-9. Y-axis Control Mode Forced Cancel Function

The Y-axis is controlled based on the YS-axis position parameter set as the spindle center.The Y-axis cannot be controlled normally if the spindle center position of YS-axis is changed duringthe Y-axis control mode. For this reason, an interlock function is provided to inhibit change of YS-axis position parameter during Y-axis control mode.In a mode other than Y-axis control mode, the machine performs cutting with the YS-axis fixed at thespindle center position. Therefore, if the Y-axis control mode cancel command is issued, the YS-axisautomatically returns to the spindle center position before the Y-axis control mode is canceled.However, there might be a case where the spindle center position is wrongly set on YS-axis and theY-axis control mode is selected. In this case if the wrong parameter data is outside the YS-axistravel limit, the YS-axis may not be able to return to the wrongly set spindle center position. Torecover the machine from such a state, use the Y-axis control mode forced cancel function.

<Function>When “effect” is selected at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel, thealarm D, Y-axis mode forced cancel” occurs. When Y-axis mode key is pressed in the manual mode,the NC cancels Y-axis control mode without moving YS-axis to the wrongly set spindle center posi-tion

<Recovery procedure>

Procedure :

1 Select “effect” at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel.The alarm D 4258 “Y-axis mode forced cancel” occurs.

2 Select the manual mode.

3 Press the Y-axis mode key on the additional operation panel to forcibly cancel the Y-axis con-trol mode. When Y-axis mode is canceled, the back-lighted key lamp goes out.

4 Correct the system parameter data for specifying the YS-axis spindle center position.

5 Select “cancel” at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (Y-AXIS) Y-axis mode forced cancel.

6 Press the Y-axis mode key to select the Y-axis control mode, and again press the Y-axis modekey to cancel the Y-axis control mode. The YS-axis will return to the correctly set position.

<OPTIONAL PARAMETER(Y-AXIS)>Y-axis mode forced cancelcancel: Forced cancel invalid (default).effect: Forced cancel valid.

[Supplement]

G136 is usable even while the Y-axis control mode is canceled. If G136 is issued while the forcedcancel is effective, the YS-axis moves to the spindle center position.


LE32114R0400500260001

2-6-10. Resetting YS-axis Overtravel

When the YS-axis travel end limit has been exceeded, reset the state following the procedure below.Turn on the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch inside the control box.

Procedure :

1 Press the RESET button.

2 Select the manual operation mode by pressing the MANUAL key.

3 Turn on the PULSE HANDLE Y-AXIS switch.

4 Turn the pulse handle to move the YS-axis off the travel end limit position.

5 Turn off the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch.

6 Press the RESET button.

Normally, the pulse handle of YS-axis cannot be selected in any mode other than V-axis controlmode. However, it can be moved independently using the pulse handle if the PULSE HANDLE Y-AXIS switch is turned on with the TRAVEL END LIMIT RELEASE switch ON.


2-6-11. Y–axis Barrier Function (Optional)

To prevent interference of the saddle, a barrier zone is set within the axis operating range to disablethe entry of the saddle into the set barrier zone.

(1) ParametersSet the following parameters to establish the barrier zone.Setting unit, initial setting value and setting range are common to all parameters.OPTIONAL PARAMETER Y-AXIS screen

LE32114R0400500280001

(2) Barrier ZoneBarrier setting range and axis movable range are determined as shown below according to theparameter setting.

a. If a positive (+) value is setBarrier zone: “Negative stroke end limit” - Smaller than “Negative stroke end limit + Setvalue”Movable range: “Negative stroke end limit + Set value” - “Positive stroke end limit”

b. If a negative (-) value is setBarrier zone: Larger than “Positive stroke end limit + Set value” - “Positive stroke end limit”Movable range: “Negative stroke end limit” - “Positive stroke end limit + Set value”

c. If “0” is setBarrier zone: Negative stroke end limit - Positive stroke end limitMovable range: NoneThe area where the individual axes are located in the respective barrier zone is called thebarrier area.This function is invalid if the setting for this parameter is “0” for two or more axes.

X-axis barrier length (radius) Setting unit: 1 mY-axis barrier length Initial setting value: 0Z-axis barrier length Setting range: -9999999 to 99999999


(3) InterlockIn the operation in the automatic or MDI mode, if an axis movement command causing the axisto enter the barrier zone is specified or an operation to move an axis into the barrier zone isattempted, an alarm occurs and the turret stops moving.Even if manual operation to move an axis into the barrier zone is attempted, the turret stops ata point away from the barrier zone.If the turret is already positioned in the barrier zone, manually move it away from the barrierzone.In this manual operation, an axis can only be moved in the direction it moves away from the bar-rier zone.

LE32114R0400500280002

Stroke end limit

Barrier area

Barrier zone

Y

X

Z


3. PROGRAMMING

3-1. OVERVIEW

The program is created with 3dimensional coordinates of X, Y and Z-axes. In this case, the X and Y-axis commands are given with radius values. Therefore, in order to distinguish these axes fromthose used for turning, they are expressed as Xl, YI and ZI in the Y-axis control mode.

3-2. Y-AXIS CONTROL COMMANDS

3-2-1. Y-axis Control Mode Commands

Use the following G codes to enter or exit Y-axis control mode.

• Y-axis control mode ON command: G138

• Y-axis control mode OFF command: G136

[Supplement]

3-2-2. Precautions for Executing Y-axis Control Mode Commands

(1) If you execute the Y-axis control mode OFF command (G136), the YS axis is positioned at thespindle center and the Y-axis control mode goes OFF regardless of the Y-axis position.

(2) During the Y-axis control mode, you cannot use the coordinate conversion function. Turn off the Y-axis control mode before using the coordinate conversion function.

(3) Before executing the sequence return in the Y-axis control mode, return the Y-axis in the Y-axiscontrol mode beforehand.

(4) The Y-axis control mode remains effective even after NC reset or power ON/OFF. In the Y-axiscontrol mode, the X-axis commands are given with radius values.For these reasons, before attempting axis movement by MDI commands immediately after turn-ing on the power, be sure to check whether the Y-axis control mode is established or not.

• During the Y-axis control mode, the Y-axis mode button lamp lights on the option panel.• On receiving the Y-axis control mode OFF command, the NC automatically returns the Y-axis

to the turning position.


3-2-3. Axis Motion Commands

G codes which can initiate axis motion in the Y-axis control mode are G00 and G01.

(1) Usable G codesG00:Positioning at the rapid feedrateG01:Linear interpolationIn both G00 and G01 modes, X, Y, and Z commands can be designated simultaneously.

• ln Y-axis control mode, even a rapid traverse command is executed by linear interpolation.Therefore, when X-axis and Y-axis commands are designated in the same block, the rapidfeedrate is limited to the rapid feedrates of XI-axis and YI-axis.

• Since the spindle is stopped in the Y-axis control mode, designate the cutting feedrate inunits of “feed per minute”.

(2) Y-Z, X-Y plane arc commandsArc commands can be designated in the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane by selecting the Y-Z planeor the X-Y plane in the Y-axis control mode.

• Plane designation codeG19: Y-Z plane designationG18: Z-X plane designationG17: X-Y plane designation

G19 and G17 can be designated only in the Y-axis control mode.When the NC has been reset, when the Y-axis control mode has been turned off, or whenthe power has been turned on, G18 (X-Z plane designation) is effective.

• Arc designation methodY-Z plane arcG02 Y Z J K(L) F. . ClockwiseG03 Y Z J K(L) F. . CounterclockwiseX-Y plane arc

G02 X Y I J(L) F. . Clockwise

G03 X Y I J(L) F. . Counterclockwise

X: X-coordinate of the arc end pointY: Y-coordinate of the arc end pointZ: Z-coordinate of the arc end pointI: Component of arc radius in the X-axis directionJ: Component of arc radius in the Y-axis directionK: Component of arc radius in the Z-axis directionL: Radius designated as the arc radius valueF: Feedrate


LE32114R0400500320001

[Supplement]

1) In the Y-Z plane, X-axis commands can not be designated as arc commands. In the sameway, Z-axis values cannot be given to the X-Y plane arc command.

2) In the Y-Z plane, the arc rotating direction, OW or COW, should be specified by viewing theplane from the X-axis positive direction to its negative direction. On the X-Y plane, the arcrotating direction should be specified by viewing the plane from the Z-axis positive direction toits negative direction.

3) The plus and minus signs of I, J and K commands are definite (viewing the arc center from thearc start point.

4) The arc radius can be designated by using an L command or by using I, J and K commands.When the arc radius is designated using an L command, the arc whose center angle is within180° is selected.

G03YI

K

ZI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

G02YI

K

ZI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

G02YI

I

XI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point

G03YI

I

XI

JL

Arc end point

Arc start point


3-2-4. X and Y Commands

In the Y-axis control mode, YI and XI commands are designated in radius in reference to the pro-gram zero. Note that YI commands can be designated only in the Y-axis control mode.If they are designated in other than the Y-axis control mode, an alarm occurs.

3-2-5. Y-axis Zero Shift

As in the case of X- and Z-axes, the Y-axis zero point can be shifted with the Y-axis control modeON. However, since the Y-axis control mode is effective, specify the shift amount of X-axis with aradius value.

G50 X Y Z C


3-3. Y-AXIS COMPOUND FIXED CYCLES

3-3-1. Compound Fixed Cycles Usable in the Y-axis Control Mode

[Supplement]

Code Compound Fixed Cycle Name Programming FormatG181 Drilling cycle with repeat function G181, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, EG182 Boring cycle with repeat function G182, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E

G183 Deep-hole drilling cycle with repeat function

G183, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, D, E, L

G184 Tapping cycle with repeat function G184, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E

G189 Reaming/boring cycle with repeat function

G189, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, Q, E

G178 Synchronized tapping cycle in the reverse direction with repeat function

G178, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, D, J, Q

G179 Synchronized tapping cycle in the for-ward direction with repeat function

G179, X, Y, Z, C, R, I, F, D, J, Q

G190 Keyway cutting cycle with repeat function

G190, X, Y, Z, C, I(K), D, U(W), E, F, Q, M21 1/M212, M213/M214

G191 Vertical groove cycle with repeat function

G191, X, Y, Z, C, R, J, F, Q, I

G180 Cancel of compound fixed cycle G180

The compound fixed cycles usable in Y-axis control mode are limited to side face machining.For end face machining, carry out contour generation as in the conventional way.


3-3-2. Basic Axis Motions

Axes move as illustrated below by designating a block of programs in the G181, G182, G183,G184,G189, G178, or G179 mode.In the Y-axis control mode, use radial values for designating commands.

LE32114R0400500360001

Basic Axis MotionQ1 Y-,Z-,and C-axes are positioned at the rapid feedrate.Q2 The X-axis is positioned at the(Q1-shift amount I) point at the rapid feedrate.Q3 The tool moves at a cutting feedrate from point Q2 to point X.

Q4 The tool returns to the start point of the Q3 cycle at the rapid feedrate or at a cutting feedrate.

Y

Y

ZZ

Y

Y

Z

X

XX

I

I

Q1

Q1

Q2

Q2

Q3

Q3

Q4

Q4


3-3-3. Axis Motion Specific to Each Compound Fixed Cycles

(1) Drilling Cycle (G181)

LE32114R0400500370001

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G181 Xb Yb Zb C I FN103 G180

<Details of Motion>

Q1 Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode with the C-axis at its commanded position → After the completion of positioning, the M-

tool rotates in the forward direction.

Q2 Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 mode → After the completion of positioning, the C-

axis is clamped.Q3 The tool moves up to point Xb at a cutting feedrate in the G01 mode.

Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in the G00 mode → After the completion of positioning at the

cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped.

Y

Z

X

IQ1

(Xa, Ya, Za)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)(Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q2

Q3

Q4


(2) Boring Cycle (182)

LE32114R0400500370002

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G182 Xb Yb Zb C I F EN103 G180<Details of Motion>




axis is clamped.

Q3

The tool moves up to point Xb at a cuffing feedrate in the G01 mode.

→

After point Xb has been reached, the cycle is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be omitted)After the completion of the dwell, the M-tool stops.

Q4Positioning at the cuffing start point in the G00 mode →

After the completion of positioning at the cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped. The M-tool rotates in the forward direction.

Y

Z

X

IQ1

(Xa, Ya, Za)


(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q2

Q3

Q4


(3) Deep-hole Drilling Cycle (G183)

LE32114R0400500370003

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G183 Xb Yb Zb C I F E D LN103 G180<Details of Motion>




axis is clamped.

Q3

The tool moves toward point Xb by “step feed” in the G01 mode.In the “step feed” mode, cutting is performed following the steps below.The tool is fed by “D”. Then it is retracted by “ ” at the rapid feedrate. That is repeated until the depth of cut reaches “L”. The tool returns to the cutting start point at the rapid feedrate. Then, the tool is fed by “D” from the previous infeed point. This drilling cycle is repeated until the tool reaches the target point Xb.

→

After point Xb has been reached, the cycle is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be omitted)

Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in the G00 mode → After the completion of positioning at the

cutting start point, the C-axis is unclamped.

Y

Z

X

I

L

L D

Q1

(Xa, Ya, Za)

(Xa, Yb, Zb)

(Xa-l, Yb, Zb)

(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q2

Q3

Q4/2/2


(4) Tapping Cycle (G184)

LE32114R0400500370004

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G184 Xb Yb Zb C I F EN103 G180

<Details of Motion>

Q1Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode with the C-axis at its commanded position

→After the completion of positioning, the M-tool rotates in the forward direction.

Q2 Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 mode → After the completion of positioning,

the C-axis is clamped.

Q3

The tool moves up to point Xb at a cutting feedrate in the G01 mode. →

After point Xb has been reached, the cycle is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be omitted)After the completion of the dwell, the M-tool once stops and then rotates in the reverse direction.

Q4

Positioning at the cutting start point in the G01 mode →

After the completion of positioning, the C-axis is unclamped. →

The M-tool once stops and then rotates in the for-ward direction.

Y

Z

X

IQ1

(Xa, Ya, Za)


(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q2

Q3

Q4


(5) Reaming/Boring Cycle (G189)

LE32114R0400500370005

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G189 Xb Yb Zb C I F EN103 G180

<Details of Motion>




axis is clamped.

Q3The tool moves up to point Xb at a cutting feedrate in the G01 mode. →

After point Xb has been reached, the cycle is interrupted for dwell duration “E”. (can be omitted)

Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in the G01 mode → After the completion of positioning, the C-

axis is unclamped.

Y

Z

X

IQ1

(Xa, Ya, Za)


(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q2

Q3

Q4


(6) Synchronized Tapping Cycles (G178,G179,optional)

LE32114R0400500370006

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G178 Xb Yb Zb C I D FN103 G180

<Details of Motion>

Q1 Positioning at (Xa, Yb, Zb) in the G00 mode with the C-axis at its commanded position → After the completion of positioning, the C-

axis is clamped.

Q2

Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in the G00 mode →

After the completion of positioning, if a D command has been designated, the M-tool spindle is positioned at the D command point. Then the C-axis is clamped.

Q3 The M-tool spindle and the X-axis are fed simultaneously up to point Xb while rotating the M-tool spindle in the forward direction.

Q4 The M-tool spindle and the X-axis are fed simultaneously up to the cutting start point while rotat-ing the M-tool spindle in the reverse direction.

Y

Z

X

IQ1

(Xa, Ya, Za)


(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Q2

Q3

Q4


(7) Keyway Cutting Cycle (G190)(On side face)This command executes the cycle of cutting keyways which are offset in Y-axis direction or thekeyways on the Y-Z plane.

LE32114R0400500370007

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C I D F U E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

[Supplement]

Q1 Positioning at the C-axis command value in the G00 mode with X-, T-, and Z-axes remaining at the positions specified in N100

Q2 Positioning at the (Xa - I) point in G00 mode

Q3 The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point with a cutting depth D in the specified cutting direction and according to the specified cutting method.

Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in G00 mode

For designation of cutting direction, cutting method, and others, refer to the description of keywaycutting cycle in the operation and programming manuals for multi-machining function.

Y

Z

X

DUD

D

Q1

Cutting target point(Xb, Yb, Zb)

Cycle start point(Xa, Ya, Za)

Q2

I

Q3Q3

Q3Q3

Q4

Q4


(8) Keyway Cutting Cycle (G190) (On End Face)This command executes the cycle of cutting keyways which are offset in Y-axis direction or thekeyways on the X-Y plane. The keyway cutting cycle on the end face of a workpiece (X-Y plane) is possible using a contourcreation machining.

LE32114R0400500370008

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB= N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C K D F W E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

[Supplement]

Q1 Positioning at the C-axis command value in the G00 mode with X-, Y-, and Z-axes remaining at the positions specified in N100

Q2 Positioning at the (Za ? K) point in G00 mode

Q3 The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point with a cutting depth D in the specified cutting direction and according to the specified cutting method.

Q4 Positioning at the cutting start point in G00 mode

For designation of cutting direction, cutting method, and others, refer to the description of keywaycutting cycle in the operation and programming manuals for multi-machining function.

Y( Xb, Yb, Zb )Cutting target point

Q3

Q3

Q3Q3

DD

D

Q4

Q4

Q2 Q1

W

K

( Xa, Ya, Za )Cycle start point

Z

X


(9) Vertical Groove Cycle (G191)This is the cycle for performing cutting feed in Y-axis direction after positioning X-, Z-, and C-axes.

LE32114R0400500370009

<Programming Format>N100 G00 Xa Ya ZaN101 G94 SB=N102 G190 Xb Yb Zb C I D F U E M211 (M212) M213 (M214)N103 G180

<Details of Motion>

Q1 Positioning at the (Xa, Ya, Zb, C) point in G00 modeQ2 Positioning at the (Ya - J) point in G00 modeQ3 The tool moves to the (Xb, Yb, Zb) point at a cutting feedrate.Q4 The tool runs off in X-axis direction by the amount of I and returns to the Q3 cutting start point.

Y

Z

X

Q1

Cutting target point(Xb, Yb, Zb)

(Xa, Ya, Za)

Q2

I

Q3

Q4


4. Slant Machining Mode Function

4-1. Overview

MACTURN and MULTUS featuring the B-axis 1 indexing function can index a tool mounted on a tur-ret in any direction on the X-Z plane.Fig. 9-1 shows an example of a machining along a slant direction with the turret indexed slantwise(referred as slant machining hereafter).The NC needs to calculate a target position when executing axis movements indicated in Fig. 9-1.Calculating a target position will be simplified in a converted coordinate system by rotating the coor-dinate axes.The slant machining mode function simplifies calculation of a target position by using coordinateconversion; thereby facilitating programming for slant machining.

LE32114R0400500380001

X+

Z+Fig. 9-1

(Za, Xa)

Zb = Za - LZb = Za - L·coscosXb = Xa - LXb = Xa - L·sinsin

L

(Zb, Xb)Target position Pt

Start position Pf

Turret slant angle


4-2. Coordinate System for Slant Machining

To simplify the positioning in the slant machining, a converted coordinate system (a slant machiningcoordinate system) is generated when the slant machining mode is selected. In the slant machiningmode, an axis command in the converted coordinate system is converted into a position commandin the base coordinate system before axis movement.

(1) Definition of Converted Coordinate System“A coordinate system is defined as the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’ when the Z-axis isrotated counterclockwise to align with the Z’-axis with the offset position of the zero point of theX-, Y-, and Z- axes as a center of rotation in a base coordinate system.”

(2) Relation between Base and Converted Coordinate SystemsThe following figure shows the relation between the base coordinate system and the convertedcoordinate system.

LE32114R0400500390001

An angle θ between the Z-axis and the Z’-axis is a rotation angle used in coordinate conversion.The rotation center 0 of the coordinate system is the zero offset position of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes.The coordinate of a point P is defined as [Xa, Ya, Za] in the base coordinate system (X-Y-Z) andas [Xa’, Ya, Za’] in the converted coordinate system (X’-Y-Z’) in the figure above. As a result, thefollowing relations are derived. Xa’ = Xa • cosθ - Za • sinθ Za’ = Xa • sinθ + Za • cosθ

X' +

X+

Xa

Xa'

P

Za

Za'

Z' +

Z+

Fig. 9-2

0


(3) Two Spindle ModelsFor the two-spindle models such as a machine with a sub spindle or a turning center with facingspindles, the coordinate system for a mirror image of Z-axis may be selected. In this case, thecoordinate rotating direction in axis conversion is defined as a clockwise direction assumingthat the Z-axis positive direction is 0° as shown in the following figure.

LE32114R0400500390002

X

Z

X

Z

Fig. 9-3


4-3. Slant Machining Mode Commands

(1) Slant Machining Mode ON/OFF CommandsThe following G code commands select or cancel the slant machining mode.(The B command specifies a rotation angle of the coordinate system)

• The slant machining mode is effective during the period between executions of G127 com-mand and G126 command. During this mode, positioning is conducted based on the slantmachining coordinate system (X’-Y-Z’).

• When the B command is left blank, the rotation angle of the coordinate system is consid-ered as 0°.

• The slant machining mode becomes “OFF” with the NC reset or execution of M02 (end ofprogram).

(2) Restrictions on Slant Machining Mode ON/OFF CommandsIf the slant machining mode ON/OFF command (G127/G126) is issued when the following con-ditions are not met, an alarm occurs and the command will be revoked.

Conditions for issuing the slant machining mode ON command (G127)

• Y-axis mode is selected.

• Nose-R compensation is not in progress.

• Nose-R compensation is not in progress.

• Slant machining mode is not selected yet.

• Coordinate conversion is not in progress (on the machine with the coordinate conversionfunction).

• Compound fixed cycle is not under execution.

Slant machining mode OFF command (G126)

• Compound fixed cycle is not under execution.

(3) Manual Axis Feed in Slant DirectionWhen the slant machining mode ON command is issued, the B command value (coordinaterotation angle) issued in the same block is automatically set at the rotation angle on the SLANTFEED DIRECTION SET screen. This enables manual axis feed in slant direction.

G127 B*** Slant machining mode ON command(B: -359.999 - 359.999)

G126 Slant machining mode OFF command


4-4. Functions Usable in Slant Machining Mode

(1) G Codes and Axis Commands Usable in Slant Machining ModeThe following commands are available in the slant machining mode. Rapid traverse positioning command (G00) Cutting feed positioning command (G01) Circular interpolation cutting commands (G02/G03) Cutter radius compensation commands (G41/G42) Compound fixed cycle commands (G178 to G184, G189 to G191) Zero point shift command (G50)Commands other than those listed above (including fixed cycle commands) will cause an alarm.The above commands can be specified with the following axis commands:X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and C-axisThe X-, Y-, and Z-axis positions should be specified in the slant machining coordinate systemX’-Y-Z’.The C-axis command is available only when the spindle is connected with the C-axis (by M110command).Helical cutting is possible for the machine equipped with the helical cutting specification.

(2) Rapid Traverse Positioning Command (G00)Rapid traverse commands are placed under the following restrictions in the slant machiningmode.Rapid traverse rates of X-, Y-, and Z-axes in the base coordinate system are reduced to a halfof the specified parameter value during interpolation of the X-, Y-, and Z-axes (so that the rapidtraverse rate of the slant axis does not exceed the limit).The C-axis, however, moves at the rapid traverse rate specified in the relevant parameter, andits movement is not interpolated with other axes.

(3) Circular Interpolation Cutting Command and Cutter Radius Compensation CommandThe circular interpolation cutting commands and the cutter radius compensation commands areexecuted on the X’-Y plane, Z’-X’ plane, and Y-Z’ plane in the slant machining mode.The G41 and G42 issued in the slant machining mode are treated as the cutter radius compen-sation commands (instead of the nose-R compensation commands) even when the Z’-X’ planeis specified.<Specifying Compensation Plane>Before issuing the command for circular interpolation cutting or cutter radius compensation,specify a plane where such command will be executed.G17.......Cutter radius compensation on X’-Y planeG18.......Cutter radius compensation on Z’-X’ planeG19.......Cutter radius compensation on Y-Z’ planeG 18 is selected by default when the power is turned on, the NC is reset, or M02 is executed.<Cutting Direction in Circular Interpolation>

• X’-Y plane (G17)G02: Clockwise seen from Z’-axis positive direction to negative directionG03: Counterclockwise seen from Z’-axis positive direction to negative direction

• Z’-X’ plane (G18)G02: Clockwise seen from Y-axis positive direction to negative direction G03: Counterclockwise seen from Y-axis positive direction to negative direction

• Y-Z’ plane (G19)G02: Clockwise seen from X’-axis positive direction to negative direction G03: Counterclockwise seen from X’-axis positive direction to negative direction


<Restrictions on Specifying Compensation Plane and Cutter Radius ON/OFF Command>

• Be sure to specify the compensation plane (G17/G18/G19) and the slant machining modeON command (G127) before the cutter radius compensation commands (G41/G42).

• The slant machining mode ON/OFF commands are invalid during cutter radius compensa-tion (an alarm will occur).

• The specified compensation plane remains unchanged after the slant machining mode ON/OFF commands.

[Command example]

LE32114R0400500410001

(4) Compound Fixed CycleThe compound fixed cycle in the slant machining mode has the same command format as thatfor the Y-axis fixed cycle in the base coordinate system except that the operation direction ischanged to the direction in the slant machining coordinate system X’-Y’-Z.Refer to the 3-3. “Y-axis Compound Fixed Cycles” for more information.

(5) Zero Point Shift Command (G50)The zero point shift amount can be changed with the G50 command even during the slantmachining mode.The following command, when specified in the slant machining mode, changes the zero pointshift amount of the base coordinate system so that the specified axes in the slant machiningcoordinate system are located on the program coordinates. G50 X__ Z__ Y__ C__

(6) STM CommandThe STM commands are not restricted in the slant machining mode.For example, the turret can rotate even in the slant machining mode as far as the axis positionsmeet the turret rotating conditions in the base coordinate system.

:N100 G17 Specifies the compensation plane X–Y.N110 G127 B30 Selects the slant machining mode

with a slant angle of 30 .N120 G41 Activates the cutter radius

compensation to the left.:

N140 G40 Deactivates the cutter radiuscompensation.

N150 G42 Activates the cutter radiuscompensation to the right.

:N180 G40 Deactivates the cutter radius

compensation.N190 G126 Cancels the slant machining mode.N200 G19 Returns the compensation plane to Y–Z.

Compensation plane: X'-Y


(7) System VariablesThe following system variables are only read and written as the values represented in the slantmachining coordinate system in the slant machining mode.[Applicable system variables]

• VZSHX: X-axis zero point shift amount

• VZSHY: Y-axis zero point shift amount

• VZSHZ: Z-axis zero point shift amount

• VSIOX: X-axis actual position

• VSIOY: Y-axis actual position

• VSIOZ: Z-axis actual position

(8) Tool OffsetsEven during the slant machining mode, the specified tool offset values are applied to the X-, Y-,and Z-axes in the base coordinate system. This means that the X-, Y-, and Z-axis data are notused for offsetting the specified tool in the slant machining coordinate system.

(9) Variable LimitsThe X-, Y-, and Z-axis travel range in the base coordinate system is also restricted by the vari-able limits also in the slant machining mode.

(10) InterlocksIn the slant machining mode, the following commands are disabled. An alarm occurs if anycommand indicated below is specified and the specified command is disregarded.

• Y-axis mode ON/OFF command (G138, G136)

• LAP commands

• Slant machining mode ON command (G127)

• Coordinate conversion ON command (G137) (for the coordinate conversion specification)

• Spindle mode commands (G140, G141)


4-5. Zero Point Shift Macro Command

(1) OverviewMacTurn30/50 performs slant hole machining using the B-axis 1 indexing function (optional).For a turning process, the zero point in the program coordinate system is set on the centerlineof the spindle rotation. In the meanwhile, when performing a slant hole machining, specifyrequired program coordinates by shifting the zero point according to the machining point. Thus,you can make programming with ease. Specify the zero point shift amount by one of the following means. Enter a shift amount in the item “Zero point shift” in the zero setting mode. Specify an amount with a G50 command in the part program. Specify a shift amount with a system variable VZSH? (? = X, Y and Z).Since specifying an zero point shift values with the system variables requires to specify the shiftamount of X-, Y-, and Z-axes, it is necessary to change the X-axis data to a diameter value orradius value according to whether the Y-axis mode is selected or not.When the zero point shift macro command is specified, MacTurn30/50 converts the X-axis datato a diameter and a radius and sets the correct shift amounts at the system variable VZSH? (? =X, Y, and Z).

(2) Command Format

Specify shift amounts of X-, Y-, and Z-axes at SX, SY, and SZ. The specified SX value is treatedas a radius in the Y-axis mode and treated as a diameter in a mode other than the Y-axis mode.If G174 is doubly issued after shifting of zero point, the specified shift amount is added to thealready set data.When G174 is specified, the NC automatically calculates the values to be set at the systemvariables VZSHX, VZSHY, and VZSHZ, and internally issues the commands for setting thesevariables.Issuing G175 command cancels all the zero point shift commands specified by that time.

G174 SX=__ SY=__ SZ=__ :zero point shift macro commandG175 :zero point shift cancel macro command


4-6. Actual Position Display

During the slope machining mode, the actual position (X’-Y-Z’) in the converted coordinate system isdisplayed on the following screen.

LE32114R0400500430001

The following data are displayed only when the slope machining mode is selected.

• XIR X’-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

• YIR Y-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

• ZIR Z’-axis in the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’

• BA Rotation angle of the converted coordinate system X’-Y-Z’


5. DATA OPERATION

5-1. DATA OPERATION

This section describes the data setting necessary for Y-axis control function.

5-1-1. Zero Setting

• Zero OffsetThe zero offset value is set in the coordinate system for Y-axis control. This setting should bedone in ZERO SET mode.Display the zero point setting screen (for YI-axis, YS-axis) by pressing the ITEM and PAGEkeys.

LE32114R0400500450001

The YS-axis zero offset value should be set with the distance from the machine zero of YS-axisto the programming zero of YS-axis.The following relationship exists between YS-axis zero offset value and YI-axis zero offsetvalue.{(YS-axis zero offset value) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} X sin θ = (YI-axis zero offsetvalue) - (YS-axis spindle center position)If a zero offset value of either YS-axis or YI-axis is changed, the other offset value is alsochanged to maintain the above relationship.


The offset value can be set at either YS-axis or YI-axis.

LE32114R0400500450002

YI

YI-axis programming zero

YI-axis machine zero

YS-axis machine zero

YS-axis spindle center position

a: YS-axis spindle center positionb: YS-axis zero offsetc: YI-axis zero offset

: Angle formed between YS-axis and X-axis (90° for MacTurn)

X

XIYS

bc

a

a


5-1-2. TOOL OFFSET

Dimensional accuracy in machining using the Y-axis control function is controlled by tool offset data.Transverse keyway cutting

LE32114R0400500460001

Longitudinal keyway cutting

LE32114R0400500460002

Drilling at off-center positions

LE32114R0400500460003

For tool offset data, three types of offset data are available; X-axis direction, YI-axis direction, and Z-axis direction.Because tool offset data in the X- and Z-axis direction can be set in the conventional manner, theprocedure to set tool offset data in the YI-axis direction is explained here after.

Controlled by X-axis tool offset

Controlled by YI-axis tool offset

Controlled by Z-axis tool offset

YI

XI


YI

XI


YI

XI


YI-axis Tool Offset

YI-axis tool offset data is set to compensate the offset of the Y-axis tool center in the YI-axis direc-tion.YI-axis tool offset data is effective in the Y-axis control mode.

LE32114R0400500470001

(1) How to set YI-axis tool offset data:Select the tool data setting mode by pressing the TOOL DATA key. Press the function keys [F6](AXIS CHANGE) to display the YI-AXIS TOOL DATA screen. Then, move the cursor to the datacolumn of the required offset number by using the cursor control keys and set offset data.Setting is possible in an accuracy of 1 µm.

LE32114R0400500470002

Offset in Y-axis positioning

Actual Y-axispositioning point

Programmed Y-axispositioning point

YI

XI


(2) Examples of YI-axis Tool OffsetExample 1: Off-center position drilling

LE32114R0400500470003

When performing drilling at a position 50 mm away from the workpiece center as illustratedabove, if the drill is located at the 52 mm position, set -2 mm at OFFSET NO. “02” for YI-axis.Example 2: Longitudinal keyway cutting

LE32114R0400500470004

It is possible to compensate for the dimensional error due to tool wear by setting offset data atdifferent tool offset numbers. To control the keyway width, for example, assign different tool off-set numbers for the upper and lower sides of the cutting tool.For longitudinal keyway cutting as illustrated above if

Keyway width:30 mm (1.18 in.)M-tool diameter:16 mm (0.63 in.)Tool wear:0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) (actual tool diameter: 15.98 mm (0.6291 in.) ),

then the finished keyway will be 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) narrower than the required width. Toobtain accurate 30 mm (1.18 in.) width, two tool offset numbers (02 and 12) can be used for atool (tool number 02).Set 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.) for offset number “02” and -0.01 mm (-0.0004 in.) tor offset number“12”.

YI

XI

Tool offset number 02

Actual position

52(2.05)

50 (1.97)

2(0.08)

Unit : mm (in.)

Command position

Unit : mm (in.)



YI

0.01(0.0004)

0.01(0.0004)

16 (0.63)

15.98 (0.6291)

30 (1.18)

XI


Tool Nose Radius Compensation

Tool nose radius compensation can be performed in the Y-Z plane or the X-Y plane while the Y-axiscontrol mode is effective.

(1) Plane SelectionDesignate the following G codes to select the plane.G19...Tool nose radius compensation in the Y-Z planeG17...Tool nose radius compensation in the X-Y plane

[Supplement]

(2) Tool Nose Radius Compensation ON/OFF CommandsThe following G codes are used to turn on or off tool nose radius compensation.G40...Tool nose radius compensation OFFG41...Tool nose radius compensation left ON (when the tool moves at the left side of the work-piece viewed from the tool advancing direction.)G42...Tool nose radius compensation right ON (when the tool moves at the right side of theworkpiece viewed from the tool advancing direction.)

• The relation between the tool advancing direction and the workpiece location in the rectan-gular coordinate system which is composed of X-, Y-, and Z-axes is defined as follows.The tool advancing direction, or, in other words, whether the tool moves at the right side orleft side of the workpiece, is viewed from the positive direction of an axis which is perpen-dicular to the plane in which tool nose radius compensation is performed.

LE32114R0400500480001

[Supplement]

1) G19 and G17 are effective only in the M110 (C-axis connected) mode.2) When the M109 (C-axis disconnected) command is executed, G18 (tool nose radius compen-

sation in the X-Z plane) will be set automatically.3) When the power is turned on or the NC is reset, G18 (tool nose radius compensation in the X-

Z plane) will be selected automatically.

In the above figures, the tool advancing direction is viewed from the X-axis positive direction, thatis, from the machine rear.G codes which can be used to move axes in the G19 or G17 mode are G00, G01, G02, and G03.

YY

Z

X

Z

G41

G41

G42G42


(3) Tool Nose Radius Compensation ValueThe tool nose radius compensation value can be specified using a 6-digit numeral followingaddress T.T ∆∆ : Tool nose radius compensation number : Tool number ∆∆ : Tool offset numberUse X-Z-axis nose radius compensation values for compensating cutter radius onY-Z or X-Yplane as in the case of normal rotary tools.

(4) Procedure for Plane Designation and Turning ON/OFF Tool Nose Radius Compensation

• The plane designation command (G19 or G17) must be designated before designating atool nose radius compensation command (G41 or G42).

• Designate G40 before switching the tool nose radius compensation command from G41 toG42 or from G42 to G41.

• Designate G40 before designating a G code (G17, G18, G119, or G19) which selects aplane for tool nose radius compensation.

LE32114R0400500480002

N500 G19N510 G41

N580 G40N590 G42

N680 G40N690 G18


6. PARAMETER

6-1. PARAMETER

The following parameters are added to the lathe equipped with the Y-axis control function.

6-1-1. System Parameters

AXIS DATA

Using the AXIS CHANGE key, select the screen for setting the YS-axis and YI-axis data.

• stroke end limit

• Backlash

• PR zero offset

• Stroke compensation amount

• Torque value

[Supplement]

(1) Stroke end limitUse these parameters to set the stroke limits of each controlled axis. If you set the stroke endlimits, the variable limit values are forcibly changed to the set limits.

(2) BacklashUse this parameter to compensate the lost motion of YS axis. According to the set value, theNC compensates each axis movement in positive direction.The NC subtracts the backlash compensation amount from the value read by the encoder formovement in positive direction. The subtraction result is handled as the true detection value.

(3) PR zero offsetUse this parameter to compensate the actual position detected by the encoder (hereafter, calledthe detection value). The compensated value is regarded as the actual position in the machinecoordinate system.The above unit amounts are for Y-axis control mode. In the other modes, the axes move by theunit amounts normally set for XA- and ZA-axes.

For YI-axis, no data can be set at BACKLASH, PR ZERO OFFSET, and PR CONNECT COMP.If either of the YS-axis and YI-axis stroke end limits is changed, the other value is also changed tomaintain the following relationship:{(YS-axis stroke end limit valve) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} x sin θ = (YI-axis stroke endlimit valve) - (YS-axis spindle center position)

Item Default value Setting range Selling unit+ stroke end limit Machine dependant -99999.999 - + 99999.999 Selected unit system- stroke end limit Machine dependant -99999.999 - + 99999.999 Selected unit system

Backlash 0.010 -1.000 - + 1.000 Selected unit systemPR zero offset 0 -99999.999 - + 99999.999 Selected unit system


(4) Stroke comp.This parameter data is used for compensating the pitch error of simplified ball screw.This parameter will not appear if the function for compensating ball screw pitch error or Inducto-syn pitch error is selected.

Y-axis System Parameters

(1) YS.XANGLE DATAThis parameter is used to set the angle formed between YS-axis and X-axis. Since all the Y-axismovements are calculated based on this angle data, if the angle data is change, positioning ofY-axis will not be normally carried out.For MacTurn 250/350, the angle formed by YS-axis and X-axis is 120°.

(2) TURNING POSITION (YS-axis Spindle Center Position)

• This parameter is used to set the point where the YS-axis returns when the Y-axis controlmode is turned off.

• In a mode other than the Y-axis control mode, the YS-axis is fixed in the spindle centerposition.

• The machine coordinate value of the YI axis, the virtual coordinate value, is determinedassuming that the YI-axis and the YS-axis intersect with each other at the YS-axis spindlecenter position.

• For the sub-spindle specification model equipped with H2 turret, the spindle center positionabove the sub-spindle exists as the “TURNING POSITION H”.

LE32114R0400500510001


[Supplement]

6-1-2. User Parameters

• YI-axis variable limit

• YS-axis variable limit

• YS-axis droop data

(1) If either of the YS-axis and YI-axis variable limits is changed, the other value is also changed tomaintain the following relationship:{(YS-axis variable limit) - (YS-axis spindle center position)} X sin θ = (YI-axis variable limit) -(YS-axis spindle center position)

(2) Since the YI-axis is a virtual axis, its droop data cannot set.

LE32114R0400500520001

6-1-3. Y-axis Home Position (Optional)

For the lathes provided with both Y-axis control function and home position function, the home posi-tion can be set at the three axes; X, Y, and Z.Home positions of X- and Z-axes are set with the machine coordinates, while Y-axis home positionis set with the machine coordinate for YS-axis.The parameter data can be set using the SET, ADD, and CAL functions. In parameter setting byCAL function, the following formula is used to obtain the data to be set.When the function key [F3] (CAL) and the WRITE key are pressed sequentially, the coordinateswhere the axes are currently positioned are set at the parameters because the input value is 0.Value to be set by calculation = Current axis position in the machine coordinate system - Input data

The YS.X ANGLE DATA and the TURNING POSITION are basic parameters, critical for Y-axiscontrol in slant type machining. Therefore, the Y-axis control mode must be set OFF beforechanging the data of these parameters.The YS-axis coordinate value and the YI-axis coordinate value must always satiety the expres-sion that includes the YS.X data and the TURNING POSITION data. Therefore, if either the YS.Xdata or the TURNING POSITION data is changed, the parameter data of the YI-axis coordinatevalue is automatically calculated on the basis of the YS-axis coordinate value parameter data sothat the expression will be satisfied.

Yl-axis

Xl-axis

Yl-axis positivevariable limits

Yl-axis negativevariable limits


6-1-4. Y-axis Pitch Error Compensation (Optional)

This parameter is used to set compensation for YS-axis ball screw pitch error. The pitch error com-pensation increases cutting edge positioning accuracy in Y-axis direction in the Y-axis control mode.

6-1-5. Y-axis Turret Position Compensation

Besides the turret position error compensation of X- and Z-axes, the turret position error can becompensated in Y-axis direction. The compensation in Y-axis direction, which is effective only in Y-axis control mode, is carried out by the first axis movement command issued after the Y-axis controlmode is turned on.

6-1-6. Other Parameters

(1) XI-YI axis moving area expansion offsetThis parameter applies only to the LT10MY model.The YI-axis movement in positive direction is restricted by the X-axis positive travel limit.This parameter is used to expand the YI-axis moving range in the positive direction.The X-axis can move beyond its negative travel limit to compensate the YI-axis expansion setwith this parameter.

[Supplement]

(2) Automatic erasure of Y-axis graphicIf the tool path created by C-axis movement under the Y-axis control intercepts with the toolcontour line, the drawing becomes complicated and difficult to see. To prevent this, this param-eter is used to erase the tool path and tool contour line when the Y-axis control mode is estab-lished and the C-axis position is changed.effect: Tool contour line is automatically erased.cancel: Tool contour line is not automatically erased.

(3) Y-axis graphic comp plain displayThe NC equipped with the Y-axis control function allows you to select the plan view (Y-Z plane)besides the side view and the front view. This parameter is used to determine whether the planview is displayed or not. display: Plan view is displayed. do not: No plan view is displayed.

[Supplement]

This parameter becomes effective when the power is turned off and then turned on again.Changing this parameter carelessly may cause the X-axis travel limit switch to operate.

This parameter becomes effective when the power is tuned off and then turned on again.


7. APPENDIX

7-1. Y-AXIS MACHINING EXAMPLES (FOR A-TURRET SIDE ONLY)

Program example of Y-axis control is shown below.

7-1-1. Transverse Keyway Cutting

Transverse Keyway Cutting (1)

LE32114R0400500580001

Program Example 1-1

LE32114R0400500580002

ZI=100 (3.94)

YI

XI

c b

d e

a

YI

ZI

Unit : mm (in.)

N100 G13 A-turret selection

N101 G00 X800 Z800 Positioning of A-turret at indexing position

N102 M110 C-axis connection

N103 G94 X100 Z100 T0303 SB=1800 Positioning at point a, turret indexing

N104 G138 Y-axis control mode ON

N105 G00 Y50 C50 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command

N106 X30 M13 Positioning at point c, M-tool start

N107 G01 Y-50 F100 Y-axis cutting feed

N108 G00 X50 Positioning at point e

N109 Y0 M12 Positioning at point a

N110 G136 Cancel of Y-axis control mode

N111 G00 X800 Z800

N112 M109 Cancel of C-axis connection

N113 M02


Transverse Keyway Cutting (2)

LE32114R0400500590001

Program Example 1-2

LE32114R0400500590002

25(0.98)

35(1.35)

XI

c b

d e

a

YI

Unit : mm (in.)







N107 X30 Positioning at point c

N108 G01 Y-50 M13 Y-axis cutting feed, M-tool start

N109 G00 X50 Positioning at point e

N110 C260 C-axis angle command

N111 X30 Z25 Positioning at point d

N112 G01 Y50 Y-axis cutting feed

N113 G00 X50 M12 Positioning at point b

N114 Y0 Positioning at point a


N116 G00 X800 Z800


N118 M02


7-1-2. Longitudinal Keyway Cutting

LE32114R0400500600001

Program Example 2

LE32114R0400500600002

40(1.57) 110 (4.33)

YI

XIc b

a

YI

ZIad

Unit : mm (in.)






N105 G00 Y-10 C110 Positioning at point b, C-axis angle command

N106 X30 Positioning at point c

N107 G01 Z40 M13 F100 Y-axis cutting feed, M-tool start

N108 G00 X50 Positioning at point b

N109 Y0 Z110 M12 Positioning at point a, M-tool stop


N111 G00 X800 Z800


N113 M02


7-1-3. Drilling at Off-center Positions

LE32114R0400500610001

Program Example 3

LE32114R0400500610002

80 (3.15)

c b

de

a

Unit : mm (in.)







N106 G01 X-30 F100 M13 Positioning at point c, M-tool start

N107 G00 X50 Positioning at point b

N108 Y-50 Positioning at point d

N109 G01 X-30 Cutting feed up to point e

N110 G00 X50 Positioning at point d

N111 Y0 M12 Positioning at point a, M-tool stop


N113 G00 X800 Z800


N115 M02

5262-E P-169SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

SECTION 4 SUB-SPINDLE OPERATION

1. Overview

1-1. Overview

This Chapter describes sub-spindle operation and function for MACTURN and MULTUS series.Please use the information in this Chapter as auxiliary information to the OSP Operation Manualand Programming Manual.

Features of OSP’s Sub Spindle Functions

(1) The workpiece machined in the main spindle can be directly transferred to the sub spindle.

(2) The workpiece can be transferred to the sub spindle at the most appropriate pressured.

(3) The sub spindle operation can be programmed in the same image as programming the opera-tions at the main spindle.

(4) For bar materials, cut-off operation is possible.

1-2. Machine Configuration

MACTURN and MULTUS series can rotate its turret (as B-axis) around the Y-axis. When themachine cuts the workpiece held by the sub spindle, it directs a tool toward the sub spindle by rotat-ing the turret 180° around the Y-axis.

H1 turret

LE32114R0400600020001

Spindle No. 2 reference cutting position

Spindle No. 1 reference cutting position

Perpendicular cutting position

X-axisX-axis


1-3. Coordinate System

The sub spindle model with H1 turret uses three program coordinate systems for spindle No. 1(main spindle), for spindle No. 2 (sub spindle).The turret is commonly used for machining with headstock No. 1 and No. 2. In this case, the spindlecommands are effective for the spindle determined by the selected coordinate system. The coordinate system can be selected either by using the mode switch on the option panel in MAN-UAL mode or issuing the G code in AUTO or MDI mode. For the actual selection method, refer to “4.MDI/Automatic Operation” in this section.With the sub-spindle specification of the two-saddle machines, selection of only the spindle 1 sidecoordinate system is allowed for B turret.


2. Operation Panels

2-1. Basic Configuration of Operation Panels

Panels related to the machine operation are classified as indicated below:

(1) NC operation panelThe NC operation panel is used to operate the NC except for manual operation. This panel can be used to make operations, such as file operation and data setting.

(2) Machine panelThe machine panel has the switches mainly used for manual operation.

(3) Option panelThe option panel is provided with the switches and lamps required for optionally selected func-tions. The arrangement of the switches or lamps on the panel varies depending on the selectedoptional functions.

(4) Foot Pedal (Foot Switch)A foot pedal is provided to control the operation of such as chuck open/close and tailstock spin-dle advance/retract.

Panel of the machine with 2 spindles

LE32114R0400600040001


2-2. Option Panel for Sub-spindle Machines

The following panel is provided for the sub-spindle machine of MACTURN and MULTUS series.

LE32114R0400600050001

LE32114R0400600050002


2-3. Brief Explanation of the Panels

(1) SUB-SPINDLE SELETION keyThis button is use to switch the spindle mode in the manual operation mode. The lamp is pro-vided on the upper left of this key and the lamp turns off when the main spindle mode isselected and it turns on when the second spindle mode is selected. The selected spindle modeappears on the upper right of this key. With this key, selection of coordinate system can bechanged.

LE32114R0400600060001

(2) ROTARY TOOL SPINDLE SELECTION keyThis key can be used to switch CCW key, CW key, SPINDLE STOP key, SPINDLE JOG keyand 2 spindle override targets. 2 lamps indicating the selected axis are provided in 2 positions.When the left side lamp of the lamps lighting when switching the main spindle and MA axislights, the first spindle is selected. If the right side lamp lights, the MA axis is selected. When theupper lamp of the lamps lighting when switching the second spindle and MB axis lights, the sec-ond is selected. If the lower side lamp lights, the MB axis is selected. However, the lamp for thespindle that is not selected does not turn off even if the spindle mode is changed, so that youmust check the mode.

• ROTARY TOOL SPEINDLE SELECTION key

LE32114R0400600060002

• Lamps lighting when switching the first spindle and MA axis

LE32114R0400600060003

• Lamps lighting when switching the second spindle and MB axis

LE32114R0400600060004


(3) SUB SPINDLE OVERRIDEThe sub spindle speed can be set by selecting the percentage of the spindle speed specified bythe program. The sub spindle override (%) can be changed by pressing [ ] and [ ](UP/DOWN) keys. The override stops at 100%. When you continue changing the override,press one of these keys again. It is possible to select the override in 10 steps in the range 30 to200%. If the spindle speed reaches the allowable speed or the spindle limit set by G50 when itis overridden, the actual spindle speed is fixed at the allowable speed.

• Sub spindle override display

LE32114R0400600060005

• Keys using for changing the override

LE32114R0400600060006

(4) W-AXIS OPERATION keys (← and →)These keys are W-axis (Second headstock) JOG feed keys.The W-axis moves only while these keys are pressed.These keys are invalid when the second spindle mode is selected.

LE32114R0400600060007

(5) PULSE HANDLEThe W-axis is manually changed by positioning the X/Z/Y/C/W switch to W. Multiplication offeeding is the same as of the X/Z/Y/C axis switch.


3. Manual OperationThis section deals with the operations specific to the sub spindle.For standard manual operation procedure, refer to the OSP Operation Manual.

3-1. Operations Related to the Spindle 1 (Main Spindle)

The explanation below shows the operation procedure for the spindle 1 (main spindle). Note thatexplanation is given assuming that the main spindle mode is selected. Therefore, press the SUBSPINDLE SELECTION key and ensure that the LED lights (main spindle mode).

3-1-1. Preparing for Main Spindle Rotation

(1) Setting the Allowable Main Spindle Chuck SpeedSet the allowable speed of the main spindle chuck for the following parameter.MC USER PARAMETER (1 SPINDLE) Allowable chuck rotation speed

(2) Inputting the Speed Limit of the Main SpindleInput the speed limit of the main spindle in the MDI mode.=IN G50 S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

[Supplement]

(3) Inputting the Main Spindle SpeedIn the MDI mode, input the spindle speed at which the spindle should be operated.=IN S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

(4) Inputting the Gear Range for the Main Spindle (For the machine equipped with a transmission)For the machine equipped with a transmission, input the gear range that meets the input mainspindle speed. Select the MDI mode also for this operation.

3-1-2. Starting the Main Spindle CW/CCW

Procedure :

1 Confirm that the main spindle mode is selected by pressing the [MAIN SPINDLE] button.

2 Press the [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

Make sure that the main spindle mode is selected.

1) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is valid for the specified spindle speed.2) The [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button may be released after pressing it once. The

spindle keeps rotating even if the button is released.3) To start the spindle, the chuck must be in the closed state.4) An alarm occurs if the actual spindle speed exceeds 120% of the allowable speed of the

chuck.5) The door must be closed.


3-1-3. Stopping the Main Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - STOP] button on the machine operation panel.

3-1-4. Jogging the Main Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - JOG] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) Spindle jog speed is set for a parameter (machine (user) parameter).2) The spindle jogs only while the [SPINDLE - JOG] button is held pressed.3) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is not valid for spindle jog operation.


3-2. Operations Related to the Spindle 2 (Sub Spindle)

The explanation below shows the operation procedure for the spindle 1 (main spindle). Note thatexplanation is given assuming that the main spindle mode is selected. Therefore, press the SUBSPINDLE SELECTION key and ensure that the LED lights (sub spindle mode).

3-2-1. Preparing for Sub Spindle Rotation

(1) Setting the Allowable Sub Spindle Chuck SpeedSet the allowable speed of the sub spindle chuck for the following parameter.MC USER PARAMETER (2 SPINDLE) Allowable chuck rotation speed

(2) Inputting the Speed Limit of the Sub Spindle Input the speed limit of the sub spindle in the MDI mode.=IN G50 S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

[Supplement]

(3) Inputting the Sub Spindle SpeedIn the MDI mode, input the spindle speed at which the sub spindle should be operated.=IN S____ [WRITE] [CYCLE START]

(4) Inputting the Gear Range for the Sub Spindle (For the machine equipped with a transmission)For the machine equipped with a transmission, input the gear range that meets the input subspindle speed. Select the MDI mode also for this operation.

Make sure that the spindle mode IS the sub spindle mode.


3-2-2. Starting the Sub Spindle CW/CCW

Procedure :

1 Select the manual mode by pressing the [MANUAL] key on the NC operation panel.

2 Confirm that the sub spindle mode is selected by pressing the [SUB-SPINDLE] button.

3 Press the [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button at the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

3-2-3. Stopping the Sub Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - STOP] button on the machine operation panel.

3-2-4. Jogging the Sub Spindle

Procedure :


2 Press the [SPINDLE - JOG] button on the machine operation panel.

[Supplement]

1) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is valid for the specified spindle speed.For the sub spindle, use the OVERRIDE dial on the option panel.

2) The [SPINDLE - CW] or [SPINDLE - CCW] button may be released after pressing it once. Thespindle keeps rotating even if the button is released.

3) To start the spindle, the chuck must be in the closed state.4) An alarm occurs if the actual spindle speed exceeds 120% of the allowable speed of the

chuck.5) The door must be closed.

1) Spindle jog speed is set for a parameter (machine (user) parameter).2) The spindle jogs only while the [SPINDLE - JOG] button is held pressed.3) The setting of the SPINDLE OVERRIDE dial is not valid for spindle jog operation.


3-3. Axis Feed Operation (X–, Z–, C–, and W–axis)

An axis (X-, Z-, C-, or W-axis) can be moved in either of the following methods.

(1) Using SLIDE JOG buttons.

(2) Using the pulse handle

3-3-1. Jog Feed Operation (for X– and Z–axis)

Procedure :

1 Press the [SLIDE JOG] button corresponding to the required axis feed direction.Note that the arrow symbol in a button indicates the direction of saddle movement and it is notrelated to the positive and negative directions in the program coordinate system.

[Supplement]

3-3-2. Jog Feed Operation (for C–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the spindle mode.

2 Select the MDI mode and execute the C-axis joint command.


4 For the C-axis, jog feed keys do not show an arrow symbol but they show the positive and neg-ative directions in the C-axis programming coordinate system.

3-3-3. Jog Feed (for W–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the main spindle mode.

2 Press the [W-AXIS CONTROL ←] or [W-AXIS CONTROL →] button at the option panel.

[Supplement]

The saddle movable range is set by the parameter-set variable limits. For the sub spindle model, the variable limits can be set for the main spindle mode and the subspindle mode independently. Therefore, the saddle movable range differs depending on theselected spindle mode.

1) The W-axis moves only while a jog button is held pressed.2) Feedrate override setting made at the machine operation panel is valid for W-axis feed opera-

tion.


3-3-4. Pulse Handle Feed (for X–, Z–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the axis to move by pressing the [PULSE HANDLE - X] or [PULSE HANDLE - Z] key.

2 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE HANDLE - 1/1],[PULSE HANDLE - 10/1] or [PULSE HANDLE - 50/1].

3 Turn the pulse handle.The axis moves in the positive direction in the program coordinate system if the pulse handle isturned clockwise. It moves in the negative direction if the pulse handle is turned counterclock-wise.

[Supplement]

3-3-5. Pulse Handle Feed (for C–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the spindle mode.

2 Select the MDI mode and execute the C-axis joint command.


4 Select the C-axis to be moved.

5 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE - 1/1], [PULSE - 10/1],or [PULSE - 50/1] key on the machine operation panel.


The saddle movable range is set by the parameter-set variable limits. For the sub spindle model, the variable limits can be set for the main spindle mode and the subspindle mode independently.


3-3-6. Pulse Handle Feed (for W–axis)

Procedure :

1 Select the main spindle mode.

2 Select the W-axis to be moved.

3 Select the distance to move an axis per pulse by selecting the [PULSE - 1/1], [PULSE - 10/1],or [PULSE - 50/1] key on the machine operation panel.


[Supplement]

1) For pulse handle operation, selection of multiple axes for simultaneous operation is notallowed.

2) For axis feed amount per pulse, refer to the table below.

Linear feeding axis Rotary feeding axisMetric unit system inch unit system [°] unit system

1/1 1 mm/pulse 0.0001 inch/pulse 0.001°/pulse10/1 10 mm/pulse 0.0010 inch/pulse 0.010°/pulse50/1 50 mm/pulse 0.0050 inch/pulse 0.050°/pulse


3-4. M-TOOL SPINDLE OPERATION

3-4-1. Preparation before M-tool spindle Rotation

The following preparations are required before rotating the M-tool spindle.

(1) Connecting the C-axisWith the MDI operation, the machine enters C-axis connected status.M110 [WRITE/EXECUTE] [START]

[Supplement]

(2) Setting the spindle speed for the M-tool spindleThe actual M-tool spindle speed can be set with the MDI operation.SB=_[WRITE] [START]

(3) Setting the variable speed (only if variable speed is provided)The speed of the M-tool spindle can be changed by using the machine.The speed change command compliant with the spindle speed is issued with MDI operation.M24_[WRITE] [START]

3-4-2. M-tool Spindle Regular Rotation/Reverse/Stop

The procedure to operate the M-tool spindle regular rotation and reverse rotation is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the “ROTARY TOOL SPINDLE SELECTION” key on the additional panel (C-axis panel).The lamp on the upper left turns ON.

2 Press the CCW key or CW key. The M-tool spindle rotates regularly or reversed way.

3 Press the “SPINDLE STOP” key on the machine panel.

[Supplement]

The spindle mode cannot be changed after connecting the C-axis.

1) The “spindle override” on the machine panel is enabled for the M-tool spindle.2) The M-tool spindle keeps rotating even if the key is not pressed continuously.3) This operation must be executed while the door is closed.4) This operation must be executed while the spindle chuck is closed. 5) An error occurs when the tool is L-tool.6) Although the M-tool spindle rotates regardless of the spindle mode (spindle 1 or spindle 2), the

selected spindle may rotate due to operational error, so that you must check which spindle isselected.


3-4-3. M-tool Spindle Jog

The procedure to execute the M-tool spindle jog is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Press the “ROTARY TOOL SPINDLE SELECTION” key on the additional panel (C-axis panel).The lamp on the upper left turns ON.

2 Press the “SPINDLE JOG” key. Jog for the M-tool spindle is executed.

[Supplement]

1) The spindle speed for jog is set by the parameter.2) The jog operation is executed while the key is pressed.3) The override for the M-tool spindle jog is not enabled.4) The jog operation is available even if the C-axis is not connected.


3-5. Other Manual Operations

3-5-1. Air Blow

(1) Main Spindle Air BlowPress the [AIR BLOW] switch on the machine operation panel.

(2) Sub Spindle Air BlowPress the [AIR BLOW] switch on the option panel.

[Supplement]

3-5-2. Chuck Open/Close Operation

(1) Main Spindle ChuckTo open/close the main spindle chuck, use the main spindle chuck open/close footpedal.

(2) Sub Spindle ChuckTo open/close the main spindle chuck, use the sub spindle chuck open/close footpedal.

1) It is possible to jog the spindle while air blow is supplied according to the setting of a parame-ter (machine (user) parameter).

2) It is possible to change the air blow output pattern according to the setting of a parameter(machine (user) parameter).For details, refer to 8-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant) in this section.


4. MDI/Automatic OperationFor the sub-spindle specification, it is necessary to determine the coordinate system before begin-ning automatic/MDI operation.Determine the coordinate system by selecting the spindle used for machining.

4-1. Coordinate System Selection

A G code is used to select a coordinate system.With the sub-spindle specification, two coordinate systems are used - one for the spindle 1 side andthe other for the spindle 2 side.

LE32114R0400600310001

Fig.4-1 Machine ConfigurationWith the two-saddle machines, only the spindle 1 coordinate system can be selected for the B turret.For the B turret, it is not necessary to specify a coordinate system selection command.

[Supplement]

The G code for selecting the coordinate system must always be specified at the first block of aprogram.


4-2. MDI Operation

Procedure :

1 Select the MDI mode by pressing the [MDI] key on the NC operation panel.

2 Prompt “=IN” appears in the MDI data input line, indicating that the NC is ready for data input.Input the coordinate system selection G code. = IN G140 = IN G141

3 Press the [WRITE] key.

4 Press the [CYCLE START] button.

4-3. Automatic Operation

Since the automatic operation procedure is basically the same as operating the standard machineautomatically, refer to the OSP Operation Manual. In this section, only the operation procedure spe-cific to the sub spindle model is described.

(1) Sequence RestartBasic operation for sequence restart of the sub spindle model is the same as the sequencerestart for the standard machines. When executing sequence restart, however, the followingpoints must be carefully attended to.Before starting the sequence restart operation, match the actual machine status to the status ofthe active commands in the program block where sequence restart is executed.The status that must be the same as the active programmed status is: Spindle mode selection C-axis joint status Turret indexingWhen executing the sequence restart, the axes should be positioned near the position specifiedby the program.

(2) Starting a Program from Desired SequenceStarting a program from the desired sequence can be performed in the same manner as withthe standard machines. However, this operation requires your special attention.When a program is restarted from the desire sequence, the commands are executed in thecoordinate system of the presently selected spindle mode disregarding the spindle mode of therestarting block. Therefore, if the spindle mode in which the program is restarted differs from thespindle mode that was valid at the program restarting block, the machine will operate unexpect-edly.When starting a program from a desired sequence, make sure to select the spindle mode thatmatches the spindle mode to be used for the restarting block.


5. Additional Functions

5-1. Workpiece Transfer Function from the Main Spindle to the Sub Spindle

In the sub spindle model, it is possible to directly transfer a workpiece from the main spindle to thesub spindle. When transferring a workpiece to the sub spindle, the torque limit and the torque skipfunctions are used since the workpiece must be pushed against the sub spindle chuck at an appro-priate torque.For details regarding torque limit and torque skip functions, refer to the OSP Programming Manual.This subsection provides a simple program example for transferring workpiece.

LE32114R0400600340001

:

:

G29 PW = 30 .... Limits the maximum torque of the W–axis motor (30%).

G94 G22 W50 D5 L10 F1000 PW = 25 .... Pushes the sub–spindle chuck to the workpiece in the torque skip state.

G29 PW = 5 .... Lowers the W–axis motor torque (5%).

M248 .... Closes the sub–spindle chuck.

M84 .... Opens the sub–spindle chuck.

G28 .... Cancels the W–axis torque limit function.

G90 G00 W300 .... Returns the second headstock to the retract position at a rapid feed

F(feedrate)

rate.

:

:


5-2. Z–axis Mirror Image

With the sub spindle models designed for multi-process machining, the mirror image function can beused on both the main and sub spindle sides independently for longitudinal direction axis move-ments.

5-2-1. Coordinate Systems

(1) Basic Coordinate System

LE32114R0400600360001

[1] [2] [3] [4]

Z+

X+ X+

[1]Z-LMP (P) [3]Z+LMP (P) Z+[2]Z+LMP (P) [4]Z-LMP (P)

Z-LMP (M)

Z+LMP (M)

Z-LMP (M)

Z+LMP (M)

X+ Main spindle side Sub spindle side

X+LMT (P)

X-LMT (P)

X+LMT (P)

X-LMT (P)Z+

machine zero


(2) Mirror Image Coordinate System

LE32114R0400600360002

[1] [2] [3] [4]

X+ X+

[1]Z+LMP (P) [3]Z-LMP (P) Z+[2]Z-LMP (P) [4]Z+LMP (P)

Z-LMP (M)

Z+LMP (M)

Z-LMP (M)

Z+LMP (M)

X+ Main spindle side Sub spindle side

X+LMT (P)

X-LMT (P)

X+LMT (P)

X-LMT (P)

Z+Z+

Z + L M T (P)

P :Program coordinate system,M :Machine coordinate system

Variable limit

+ :Positive(plus),

- :Nagative(minus)

Axis name

Machine zero


5-2-2. Parameter Setting

To select the mirror image coordinate system, set the necessary parameter data for each of themain and sub spindles independently.

(1) Mirror image coordinate on the main spindle sideDisplay the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen.Set the item “1st spindle mirror image select (Z)” to “Select”.

(2) Mirror image coordinate on the sub spindle sideDisplay the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen.Set the item “2nd spindle mirror image select (Z)” to “Select”.

[Supplement]

(3) Variable Limits Set by User ParametersTo switch between the basic coordinate system and the mirror image coordinate system, theplus and minus designation of the Z-coordinate are changed only in the program coordinatesystem. Therefore, variable limit values in the machine coordinate system are not changedeven when the mirror image coordinate system is selected.

LE32114R0400600370001

The setting of the parameter above becomes valid when the power is turned on.If the setting is changed, press function key [F5] (BACKUP) to back up the new setting, turn offthe power and then turn it on again.The initial status is “basic coordinate system” for the main spindle and the “mirror image coordi-nate system” for the sub spindle.

Z-axis Variable Limit Main Spindle Side Sub Spindle SideZ+ variable limit (P) 250 300Z- variable limit (P) -30 -50Z+ variable limit (M) 6016.000 6678.000Z- variable limit (M) 5736.000 6328.000

Z-LMP (M)

Z+LMP (M)

Z-LMP (M)Z+LMP (M)

X Main spindle side Sub spindle side

Z+LMT (P) Z+LMT (P)

Z-LMT (P) Z-LMT (P)

Z


If the coordinate system for the main spindle is switched to the mirror image coordinate systemand that for the sub spindle to the basic coordinate system with the above parameter settings,the coordinate values will change as shown below.

LE32114R0400600370002

5-2-3. Coordinate System Designation

Designate the coordinate system to be selected, fundamental or mirror image, in the starting blockof the program. When the coordinate system designated in the part program and the coordinate sys-tem set by the parameter do not agree, an alarm occurs.Selecting the fundamental coordinate system: G62 Z0Selecting the mirror image coordinate system: G62 Z1When G62 is designated, the coordinate system designated in the part program and the coordinatesystem set by the parameter are verified for safety. An alarm does not occur, however, even whenG62 is not designated.

5-2-4. Others

• When Z-axis is moved at the rapid traverse with G00 positioning command on either main orcub spindle side, designation of a command that brings the saddle and the chuck closer to eachother exceeding the variable limit will cause an alarm. This alarm is indifferent to the direction inthe program coordinate system switched between fundamental coordinate and mirror imagecoordinate.

• For the mirror image on the sub spindle side, see C. Y-AXIS CONTROL/SLOPE MACHININGFUNCTION.

Z-axis Variable Limit Main Spindle Side Sub Spindle SideZ+ variable limit (P) 30 50Z- variable limit (P) -250 -300Z+ variable limit (M) 6016.000 6678.000Z- variable limit (M) 5736.000 6328.000

X

Z

Z-LMP (M)

Z+LMT (P)

Z-LMT (P) Z-LMT (P)

Z+LMP (M)

Z-LMP (M)Z+LMP (M)

Main spindle side Sub spindle side

Z+LMT (P)


5-3. Interlock (for two-saddle models only)

5-3-1. Collision Preventive Function

Since the W-axis and the ZB-axis are mounted on the same bed, there is a possibility that they col-lide each other. To avoid this, the collision preventive function is provided so that the B-turret and thesub spindle base will not collide each other.

LE32114R0400600400001

(1) FunctionThe actual distance between the B-turret and the sub spindle is constantly monitored. When thedistance becomes smaller than the value set at the optional parameter during axis feed, analarm will occur or commands will be disregarded, corresponding to the operation modeselected; in the manual mode, the commands will be disregarded and in the automatic and MDImodes, an alarm will occur.Even if an alarm occurs, axis motion in the direction that increases the distance between the B-turret and sub spindle is possible.

a. Automatic or MDI modeAn alarm will occur if “actual distance < parameter-set distance” during axis feed.

b. Manual modeCommands will be disregarded if “actual distance < parameter-set distance” during axisfeed. Note however the manual axis feed in the direction to increase the distance (ZB-axisfeed in the negative direction and W-axis feed in the positive direction) is possible.

(2) Parameter settingFollow the procedure below to set a value at the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPIN-DLE) Interference-free distance ZB-W (sub spindle).

a. In the manual mode, approximate the B-saddle and sub spindle base to a point wherethere is no interference between them.

b. In this condition, select the OPTIONAL PARAMETER (1ST-2ND SPINDLE) screen in theparameter setting mode.

c. Move the cursor to Interference-free distance ZB-W (SUB SPINDLE).

d. Press the [F1] (SET) key to input the distance between the B-turret and sub spindle base.If data other than the initial value has already been input, it is also possible to change theset value by using the [F2] (ADD) function.Setting unit: 1 µmSetting range: 40000 to 9999999Initial setting: 9999999

[Supplement]

If the software is re-installed, set this parameter again.

B turret

Z B-axis W-axis

Sub spindle base


5-4. W-axis Cutting Function (Optional)

The W-axis cutting function optionally available for one-saddle models only.

(1) Outline of the FunctionThe W-axis cutting function allows simultaneous cutting of a workpiece clamped in the mainspindle chuck using a tool set in the sub spindle and a tool in the turret. In this case, the subspindle base is regarded as a turret, and its motion is independently controlled as “W-axis”.

(2) ProgrammingWhen this function is selected, the coordinate system established by the main spindle and thesub spindle base is created in addition to the coordinate system by the main spindle and the tur-ret. Therefore, G codes to switch the coordinate system become necessary.G code designating the turret coordinate system: G13G code designating the sub spindle base coordinate system: G14

• The program for the G13 side can be created in the same manner as the program for nor-mal one-saddle models. However “G13” must be designated in the starting block of theprogram.

[Supplement]

a. W-axis commands

LE32114R0400600410001

b. Synchronizing P commandA P command is used for synchronizing the execution of the commands designated inthe G13 side.

c. S and M commands for the main spindleThese commands must match with those designated in the G13 side.

d. Sub spindle chuck open/close commandsM248: Sub spindle chuck closeM249: Sub spindle chuck open

Coordinate System to be Selected Commanded Code

TurretMain spindle side

G13G140

Sub spindle side G141W-axis cutting using the sub spindle base G14

Commands for the G14 side can be designated only when the G13 side is in the G140 mode.W-axis commands cannot be designated when the G13 side is in the G141 mode.At the G14 side, only the following commands can be designated.

Rapid feed : G00Cutting feed : G01 G94 (feed per minute)

G95 (feed per revolution)


(3) Sub Spindle Rotation Commands from the G14 SideWhen a drill is mounted to the sub spindle and a workpiece clamped by the main spindle chuckis drilled using the W-axis cutting function, the sub spindle in the G14 mode can be regarded asthe M-tool in multi-machining models. Therefore, the commands for the sub spindle in the G14mode with the W-axis cutting function active should be as follows.

a. Sub spindle rotation commandsM12: Sub spindle stopM13: Sub spindle (M-tool) forward rotationM14: Sub spindle (M-tool) reverse rotation

b. Sub spindle speed commandSB=

c. Sub spindle motor winding change-over commandsM241: Sub spindle motor low-speed winding (only for sub spindle VAC motor models)M242: Sub spindle high-speed winding (only for sub spindle VAC motor models)


6. Programming

6-1. Coordinate System

6-1-1. Coordinate Systems and Coordinate Values

To move a cutting tool to a target position, the coordinate system must first be established and thenthe target position specified by the coordinate values in the established coordinate system. Thereare three kinds of coordinate systems as shown below and in a program, target points are all speci-fied by the coordinate values in the program coordinate system.

• Sensor coordinate system

• Machine coordinate system

• Program coordinate system

In the case of a sub spindle model, the spindle to be used for machining is selected meeting thedesired operation. Whichever spindle is selected, positioning is always executed by the movementsof the X- and Z-axis of the turret. Since only one pair of X- and Z-axis actually exist, three is only onesensor coordinate system and machine coordinate system. However, a program coordinate systemcan be established for the main spindle and the sub spindle independently, and the program coordi-nate system is automatically selected according to the selection of the spindle mode.

6-1-2. Program Coordinate System

A program coordinate system is used as the reference coordinate system for programming. For asub spindle model, each of the spindle has its own program coordinate system and zero offset canbe set independently. Note that the Z-axis direction of the program coordinate system establishedfor the sub spindle is opposite to that of the machine coordinate system.The axis direction in the program coordinate for sub spindle can be selected as required using themirror image function. The B-axis rotating direction used for B-axis positioning command generallydepends on the Y-axis direction. For MACTURN and MULTUS series, its direction is uniformly deter-mined as described below.

On the main spindle side, CCW rotation facing the turret is regarded as the B-axis positive direction.On the sub spindle side, CW rotation facing the turret is regarded as the B-axis positive direc-tion.


6-1-3. Coordinate System Selection

(1) One-saddle ModelsG codes are used to select the coordinate system.The coordinate system should be selected by specifying appropriate G code in the startingblock of the program. Note that the block containing the coordinate system selection G codemust not contain other commands.

[Supplement]

(2) Two-saddle ModelsSpecify the coordinate system selection G code in the block immediately after the block where asaddle selection G code (G13/G14) is specified.For B-turret, only the main spindle can be selected. At the G14 (B-turret) side, it is not neces-sary to specify a spindle selection G code since the spindle mode at the G14 side is fixed at theG140 (main spindle) mode.

6-1-4. Cautions on Switching the Spindle Modes

It is not allowed to switch the spindle mode in the following states.

• Incremental programming mode

• Nose-R compensation mode

• LAP (automatic programming) mode

• Constant surface speed control mode

• Buffering arbitrary-angle chamfering sequences

Coordinate System Selection G CodeSpindle 1 coordinate system G140Spindle 2 coordinate system G141

At the beginning of a program, either of the spindle selection G codes must be specified.


6-2. Program Commands

Only a difference between programming for standard models and sub spindle models is whether ornot a spindle mode selection G code that calls the corresponding coordinate system is specified atthe beginning of a program. Concerning the programming in the coordinate system called by thespindle mode selection G code, there are no differences from the programming for standard models.For two-saddle models, if the same spindle mode is selected for both of the turrets, programmingcan be made in the same manner as for standard two-saddle models. If different spindle modes areselected, programming can be made in the same manner as programming for one-saddle models.

6-2-1. Commands

Basic codes and commands used for programming such as G codes, M codes, S commands, Tcommands, and fixed cycle commands are the same as those used for standard models. In additionto these codes and commands, the functions specific to the sub spindle models can be used.

6-2-2. Functions Specific to the Sub Spindle Models

The sub spindle models have the unique feature in workpiece transfer between the two spindles sothat integrated multiple-processes operation can be performed in one machine. The functions indi-cated below are provided to implement this feature effectively.

(1) W-axis CommandsThe relative position of the sub spindle to the main spindle can be controlled using W-axis com-mands.For W-axis movement control, either the G00 (positioning) or the G01 (linear interpolation; cut-ting feed) can be used.<G code>G00.....PositioningG01.....Linear interpolation<Format>G00 W GG01 W F

[Supplement]

In the linear interpolation (G01) mode, designation of both G94 (feed per minute) and G95 (feedper revolution) are possible. In the G94 (feed per minute) mode, however, W-axis feedrate is con-trolled based on the main spindle speed.For one–saddle model, the main spindle mode must always be selected.For two–saddle model, selection of the spindle mode is possible at both of the G13 and G14sides. However, both of G13 and G14 sides must select the main spindle (G140).For two-saddle model, it is necessary to specify which of the W-axis commands (commands atthe G13 side or G14 side) is valid to avoid problems caused by W-axis commands specified atboth sides by mistake. G122...W-axis commands may be specified only at the G13 side. G123...W-axis commands may be specified only at the G14 side.Designation of G122 and G123 must be synchronized in the G13 and G14 side programs.At power on, the G122 mode is valid.


(2) Main/Sub Spindle Synchronized Rotation CommandUsing the synchronized rotation command, it is possible to match the sub spindle state (speed,rotation direction, phase) with the main spindle state. In the synchronized control mode, it is notnecessary to specify the spindle speed and rotation commands for the sub spindle.<M code>M150...Synchronized rotation mode cancelM151...Synchronized rotation mode ON

[Supplement]

[Supplement]

(3) Opposing Spindle Chuck Open/Close CommandThis command is used to open/close the chuck of the spindle opposite to the presently selectedspindle mode.<M code>M248...Opposing spindle chuck close commandM249...Opposing spindle chuck open command

(4) Opposing Spindle Chuck Open/Close Interlock Release CommandBy releasing the opposing spindle chuck operation interlock, it is possible to open/close thechuck of the opposite spindle mode.<M code>M246...Opposing spindle chuck open/close interlock release OFFM247...Opposing spindle chuck open/close interlock release ON

(5) Opposing Spindle Air Blow CommandThis command is used to turn ON/OFF the spindle air blow for the spindle mode opposite to thepresently selected spindle mode.<M code>M288...Opposing spindle air blow OFFM289...Opposing spindle air blow ON

6-2-3. System Variables

System variables are used in common to all coordinate systems. Therefore, if system variableswhich have the coordinate system dependent data are used, a program must be written ensuringthat the objective coordinate system is selected when entering such system variables in a program.For data input/output operation using system variables, the data of the selected coordinate systemis input/output.

The synchronized rotation command can be issued even if the spindle to be synchronized isrotating. In this case the spindle rotates in the same way before the synchronization rotation com-mand was issued when the synchronized rotation command is canceled.

If a synchronized rotation command is specified without workpiece, the sub spindle may cause“DIFF over alarm”. This is because the NC judges that a workpiece is gripped when the sub-spin-dle side chuck is closed during synchronized rotation and limits the torque on the sub-spindleside. This alarm does not occur when both main and sub spindles grip the same workpiece andare physically connected.


7. Data Operation

7-1. Zero Setting

For the sub spindle models, a programming zero can be set for each of the coordinate systemswhich are defined by the combination of G13, G14, G140, and G141.For one-saddle machines, it is not necessary to specify G13/G14.Zero offset and zero shift of the W-axis can be set for the A-turret and B-turret side independently.

LE32114R0400600500001


7-1-1. Zero Offset

(1) Coordinate System at Spindle 1 SideSet the program zero of the coordinate system established for the spindle 1.Set also the zero point of the W-axis which is used for W-axis operation.Although the setting can be made in the same manner as setting the zero point data for thestandard specification machines, it is necessary to ensure that the main spindle mode isselected. When the main spindle mode is selected, the lamp in the [MAIN SPINDLE] button atthe option panel lights.Note that the W-axis zero offset defines the program coordinate system of the sub spindle inreference to the main spindle and, therefore, it is not influenced by the turret position at all.

(2) Coordinate System at Spindle 2Set the programming zero of the coordinate system established by the turret and the spindle 2.In the spindle 2 mode, set the Z-axis direction offset value of the tool nose position in referenceto the sub spindle for the Z-axis zero offset data. Since the sub spindle can move in the Z-axisdirection, if the sub spindle is moved after the Z-axis zero offset is set, the Z-axis zero offsetvalue is automatically corrected by the moved distance.The data necessary for automatic offset data correction is automatically set for the W-axismachine coordinate system zero offset when the Z-axis zero offset is set.

(3) Two-saddle ModelsFor the two-saddle models, set the program zero of the coordinate system established by the B-turret and the spindle 1 in addition to the program setting explained in items (1), (2) and (3).The W-axis zero point should also be set here for executing a W-axis command from the G14side.Note that the W-axis zero offset defines the program coordinate system of the sub spindle inreference to the main spindle and, therefore, it is not influenced by the B-turret position at all.

7-1-2. Setting the Offset Data

Procedure :

1 Select the manual mode.

2 Select the coordinate system for which the zero point is set.Turret selection key [A/B for 2-saddle model)“Sub spindle selection” key [MAIN SPINDLE/SUB-SPINDLE] (on the option panel)

3 Move the axes to the desired position using the SLIDE JOG buttons or the pulse handle.

4 Select the zero setting mode.

5 Select the axis for which zero point is set using the function key [AXIS CHANGE] and cursorcontrol keys.

6 Set the data using the function keys [F1] (SET), [F2] (ADD), or [F3] (CALC).

7 Set the zero offset data in the other coordinate systems by repeating the above procedure.


7-1-3. Setting the Zero Offset Data/Zero Shift Data for X–/Z–axis in the Sub Spindle Mode

Procedure :

1 Select the zero setting mode.

2 Select [MAIN SPINDLE/SUB-SPINDLE] by using the Sub spindle selection” key.

3 For the X-axis zero offset, set the distance (1) from the machine zero to the program zero point.For the Z-axis zero offset, which differs according to the W-axis position, move the Z-axis sothat the tool nose of the reference tool is in contact with the workpiece end face as shown inFig. 5-1 and press function key [F3] (CAL).

LE32114R0400600530001

Fig.4-2 When Program Zero is Set at Left End Face of Workpiece

To set the program zero at the left end face of a workpiece as shown in Fig. 7-1, press the functionkey [F3] (CAL), and then press the WRITE key. The Z-axis actual value (2) from the machine zero isset for ZERO OFFSET of Z. At the same time, the difference (2) - (3) between the value (2) and theW-axis actual value (3) from the machine zero is set at the system parameter “Z-axis machine zerooffset”.To set the program zero at the right end face of a workpiece as shown in Fig. 7-2, the workpiecelength (4) must be added to the offset value. The procedure is as follows:

X+

W+

Z+

Turret

Sub-spindle

Program zero

W-axis machine zero

Turret machine zero

(1)

(2)

(3)


Procedure :

1 Press the function key [F3] (CAL), enter the value (4), and then press the WRITE key.

LE32114R0400600530002

Fig.4-3 Setting Program Zero at Right End Face of WorkpieceIn this operation, the value {(2) + (4)} is set for the Z-axis zero offset.At the same time, the difference from value (3) {(2) + (4) - (3)} is set for the Z-axis zero offset(system parameter). That is, the machine zero offset is the relative value of the Z-axis zero off-set in reference to the W-axis position. This allows the Z-axis zero offset to be automaticallycalculated by the NC from the W-axis position and the Z-axis machine zero offset even whenthe W-axis position changes.

[Supplement]

The Z-axis zero offset in the sub-spindle mode automatically changes as the movement ofthe W-axis.

X+

W+

Z+

Turret

Sub-spindleProgram zero

W-axis machine zero

Turret machine zero

(1)

(2) (4)

(3)


8. Description of ParametersSince the basic data setting method in the parameter setting mode is the same as used for settingthe data of standard machines, refer to the PART IV. “PARAMETERS” in OSP Operation Manual forthe procedure for setting the parameters.When the coordinate values are set using the calculation function, however, the data valid in theselected operation mode is used.Therefore, if data is calculated based on the coordinate values of the Z- and W-axis in the machinecoordinate system in the state the spindle selected in the active operation mode and the spindlemode selected in the data setting mode differ, the data will not be calculated correctly. To set thedata using the calculation function, be sure to select the manual operation mode and select thecoordinate system where data will be set before proceeding with the data setting steps using theCAL key.An error occurs if the spindle selected in the data setting mode and the spindle mode selected in theoperation mode differ from each other. Concerning the setting and addition operation, it is not nec-essary to pay attention to the operation mode.

8-1. System Parameters

The system parameters that are added for this specification are indicated below.For the parameters not explained below, refer to OSP Operation Manual.

• +STROKE END LIMIT (W)

• -STROKE END LIMIT (W)

• BACKLASH (W)

• PR ZERO OFFSET (W)

• MC ZERO OFFSET (W)

• TORQUE VALUE (W)

LE32114R0400600550001


8-2. User Parameters

User parameters can be set for each of the three coordinate systems.The desired coordinate system should be selected using the turret selection key ([A], [B]) and thespindle selection key (SUB SPINDLE MODE).The initial settings and setting ranges for each of the entries on this screen are as follows.

• VARIABLE LIMITThe variable soft-limits determine the stroke range of the X (Z) axis in accordance with theworkpiece.They can be used to set the turret indexing position, prevent inappropriate positioning due toprogramming errors, and protect the chuck and tailstock.Variable soft-limits are set for both the positive and negative axis directions. They cannot be setoutside the stroke end limits.

[Supplement]

• DroopThe servo follow-up function of the feed axes has a fundamental lag (DIFF) with respect to func-tion generation. Due to this lag, particularly during high-speed cutting, droop is generated atcorners. This droop can be reduced by program commands and parameter settings.

Initial Setting Setting Range Setting UnitsDepends on the machine

specifications -99999.999 to +99999.999 Selected unit system

1) When using a machine with the two-saddle specification, select the parameter screens foreach saddle control axis with the turret selection keys. When using a machine with the multi-ple machining specification, some setting fields relating to the C-axis are displayed but sincethe C-axis is a rotary axis it requires no variable soft-limit settings.

2) Variable soft-limit settings can be made either in reference to the program zero (P) or themachine zero (M).

Initial Setting Setting Range Setting UnitsLinear axis 10 (µm) C-axis 0.07 (deg) 0 to 1.000 Selected unit system


8-3. Chuck Parameters

The chuck data of the chuck on the main spindle is set for the standard chuck/tailstock spindleparameters.For the second spindle chuck, set the parameter data using the following screens.

LE32114R0400600570001

The settings made on the CHUCK parameter screen are explained below.

• CHUCK HOLD CHANGESelect OD or ID chucking.

• CHUCK/CENTER WORK CHANGE Select chuck work or center work.

• CHUCK BARRIERThe chuck barrier function allows an area into which the tool cannot enter to be set in accor-dance with the shape of the chuck. The chuck barrier check can be switched ON and OFF byprogram commands (M codes) so that it is performed only when necessary during cutting.

Initial setting OD-GRIP

Initial setting CHUCK WORK

Code DescriptionL Chuck jaw lengthD Chuck jaw sizeL1 Chuck jaw gripping lengthD1 Chuck jaw gripping face widthCX Chuck gripping diameterCZ Distance from program zero


[Supplement]

[Supplement]

1) The chuck barrier is set in the program coordinate system. Therefore, the shifting of the Z-axisprogram zero when the workpiece changes causes the barrier area to shift accordingly.

2) If the chuck barrier is set outside the variable soft-limit area, the variable soft-limit defines thechuck barrier at that location.

3) When the NC control software is installed, the initial settings are set for all the chuck barrierdata.

4) The only barrier data for which [F3] [CAL] in the function menu can be used are jaw positionsCX and CZ. For all other data, use [F1] (SET) or [F2] (ADD).

Even when a two-saddle specification machine is being used, only one set of CX/CZ jaw positiondata can be set. This makes it impossible to perform a chuck barrier check if the program zeros atsaddle A and saddle B are at different physical positions.


8-4. Machine System Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)

For one set of M codes which control air blow and coolant outputs, the OSP provides two outputs.These outputs can be changed over according to the coordinate system in which control commandsare specified.The settings made on the AIRBLOW/COOLANT parameter screen are explained below.

• Airblow A (M89/M88) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow A (M89/M88).

• Airblow B (M51/M50) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow B (M51/M50).

• Airblow C (M155/M154) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow C (M155/M154).

0 : Fixed as first airblow A1 : Fixed as second airblow A2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)

G13 side: First airblow A outputG14 side: Second airblow A output

3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)G140 side: First airblow A outputG141 side: Second airblow A output

Initial setting Setting Range0 0 to 3

0 : Fixed as first airblow B1 : Fixed as second airblow B2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)

G13 side: First airblow B outputG14 side: Second airblow B output

3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)G140 side: First airblow B outputG141 side: Second airblow B output


0 : Fixed as first airblow C1 : Fixed as second airblow C2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)

G13 side: First airblow C outputG14 side: Second airblow C output

3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)G140 side: First airblow C outputG141 side: Second airblow C output



• Airblow D (M127/M126) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow D (M127/M126).

• Airblow E (M219/M218) output selectionSelect the type of output for airblow E (M218/M219).

• Coolant 1 (M09/M08) output selectionSelect the type of output for coolant 1 (M09/M08).

0 : Fixed as first airblow D1 : Fixed as second airblow D2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)

G13 side: First airblow D outputG14 side: Second airblow D output

3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)G140 side: First airblow D outputG141 side: Second airblow D output


0 : Fixed as first airblow E1 : Fixed as second airblow E2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)

G13 side: First airblow E outputG14 side: Second airblow E output

3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)G140 side: First airblow E outputG141 side: Second airblow E output


0 : Fixed as first coolant 1 output1 : Fixed as second coolant 1 output2 : Follows the turret selection (G13/G14)

G13 side: First coolant 1 outputG14 side: Second coolant 1 output

3 : Follows the spindle selection (G140/G141)G140 side: First coolant 1 outputG141 side: Second coolant 1 output





• Coolant 4 (M440/M439) output selectionSelects as the output condition of Coolant 4 (M440/M439).

• High-pressure coolant output selection (Coolant 1 to 4)Determines whether the high-pressure coolant is used or not for each of the coolants 1 to 4.

• Thru-spindle coolant clogged filter detection ineffectiveDisables detection of clogged filter in the through-spindle coolant system.

• Turret index delay for high press. coolantSet the waiting time after high-pressure coolant is stopped until the turret indexing is started.









0 : Coolant 4 is always used for spindle No. 1.1 : Coolant 4 is always used for spindle No. 2.2 : Coolant 4 is used for the turret selected (by G13/G14).

G13 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 1.G14 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 2.

3 : Conforms to the turret selected (by G140/G141)G140 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 1.G141 side: Coolant 4 is used for spindle No. 2.

Initial Setting (No check mark)

Initial Setting (No check mark)

Initial Setting Setting Range Setting Unit200 1 to 990 0.01 s


8-5. Machine User Parameter (Airblow/Coolant)

By the setting of a parameter, it is possible to jog the spindle while the air blow command is exe-cuted. If the parameter setting is so made that air blow 1 is always output disregarding the activecoordinate system, the main spindle jogs. If air blow 2 is always output due to the setting of theparameter, the sub spindle jogs.The settings made on the AIRBLOW/COOLANT parameter screen are explained below.

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow ASet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M89 command is given.

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow BSet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M51 command is given.

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow CSet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M155 command is given.

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow DSet the check mark to jog the spindle when an M127 command is given.

• Spindle inching with 1st/2nd airblow ESet the spindle to jog the spindle when an M219 command is given.

Initial setting No check mark






8-6. Machine User Parameter (Chuck)

The settings made on the CHUCK parameter screen are explained below.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle chuck clamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck clamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the clamp-ing operation is considered completed when a chuck clamp command is given.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle chuck unclamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck unclamp confirmation input signal comes ON before theunclamping operation is considered completed when a chuck unclamp command is given.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle chucking miss detect start timerOn machines featuring the chucking error detection specification, Set the time lapse after thechucking error detection air output coming ON that the chucking error pressure input is con-firmed.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle air chuck clamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck clamp confirmation input signal comes ON before the clampoperation is considered completed when an air chuck clamp command is given.

• Air chuck unclamp answer timerSet the time lapse after the chuck unclamp confirmation input signal comes ON before theunclamp operation is considered completed when an air chuck unclamp command is given.

• Opposite M command effective in chuck movingSet the check mark to specify the following: if, before completion of the operation specified byan M83 or M84 command given together with an M64 command, an M code command specify-ing an opposite operation is given, this opposite operation will be performed without waiting forcompletion of the current operation.

• Chuck interlock effectiveSet effective/ineffective of alarm check for “1st spindle chuck interlock/” signal when the chuckclamp/unclamp command is executed (when chuck is operating). Alarm check is effective whencheck mark is entered.









8-7. Machine User Parameter (Spindle)

For the spindle related parameters, separate screens are provided for the main and the sub spindle.Therefore, when setting parameters, make sure that the displayed screen is for the desired spindle.The settings made on the SPINDLE parameter screen are explained below.

(1) Page 1/2 (1ST SPINDLE), Page 2/2 (2ND SPINDLE)

• Allowable chuck rotation speedSet the maximum chuck rotation speed for the chuck used.

• Inching speedSet the spindle speed when a spindle jog command is given.

• No Spindle stop with M00/M01/M02/M30Set the check mark to prevent the spindle being stopped by M00/M01/M02/M30 com-mands.

• Orientation direction CWSet the check mark to make the direction of rotation of the spindle when it is oriented fromthe stopped state “clockwise.”

• Orientation direction CCWSet the check mark to make the direction of rotation spindle when it is oriented from thestopped state “counterclockwise.”

• Orientation answer timerSet the time lapse after reaching the target angle range before a spindle orientation opera-tion is considered to be completed.

• Orientation electric type select (pin/brake)Set the check mark when not using the pin input/output signals or brake input/output sig-nals with the pin type or brake type orientation function.

• No orientation cancel with M02/M30 (electric)Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after execution of M02/M30 whenusing the electrically controlled orientation function.

Initial setting Setting Range0 0 to Maximum chuck rotation speed

Initial setting Setting Range40 1500








• No orientation cancel with operation mode change (electric) Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after the operation mode ischanged (between automatic/MDI and manual) when using the electrically controlled orien-tation function.

• No orientation cancel with NC reset (electric)Set the check mark to maintain the spindle oriented state after NC reset is made whenusing the electrically controlled orientation function.

8-8. Machine System Parameter (Spindle)

The settings made on the SPINDLE parameter screen are explained below.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle oscillation speedSet the oscillation speed when the spindle gear speed range is changed. (Spindle override isineffective.)

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle torque limit valueSet the limit value for motor torque when the spindle is accelerating or decelerating. By reduc-ing this value it is possible to restrict the current flow to the spindle motor during accelerationand deceleration.

• 1st spindle/2nd spindle S command cancel by M02/M30When an M02/M30 command is executed, the S command value effective up to that point iscancelled.





Initial setting Check mark set


8-9. Machine System Parameter (Door Interlock)

The settings made on the DOOR INTERLOCK parameter screen are described below.

• Allowable 1st spindle/2nd spindle maximum speedEven when the door interlock is ON, spindle speeds generated by spindle jog, oscillation, or ori-entation commands do not cause an alarm if they are within the setting for this parameter.

• Feed axis maximum speedSet the maximum feedrate when the door is open, which will apply even under conditions otherthan the following: [DOOR INTERLOCK] switch OFF and automatic operation mode and singleblock mode not selected.

• Allowable Milling spindle maximum speed A-side/B-sideSet the maximum spindle speed generated by M-tool spindle jog, oscillation, or orientation com-mands that will not cause an alarm even when the door interlock is ON.

• Door lock release timerFor a machine equipped with the mechanical lock type manual door opening/closing mecha-nism, set the time lapse after pressing the mechanical lock switch lock release button before thelock of the mechanical lock switch is released.






8-10. Machine System Parameter (Milling Spindle)

The settings made on the MILLING SPINDLE parameter screen are explained below.

(1) Page 1/2 (A-SIDE) and page 2/2 (B-SIDE)

• Oscillation speedSet the M-axis oscillation speed when the M-axis gear speed range is changed.

• Torque limit valueSet the limit value for motor torque when the M-axis is accelerating or decelerating. Byreducing this value it is possible to restrict the current flow to the M-tool spindle motor dur-ing acceleration and deceleration.

• SB command cancel by M02/M30When an M02/M30 command is executed, the S command value effective up to that pointis cancelled.

• Number of oscillation (for clutch connection)If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the numberof M-axis oscillations for engaging the clutch for this parameter.

• Oscillation speed (for clutch connection)If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the M-axisoscillation speed when engaging the clutch.

• Oscillation timer (for clutch connection)If using a machine equipped with the M-axis one-point clutch mechanism, set the M-axisoscillation time when engaging the clutch.



Initial setting Check mark set




5262-E P-216SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEXING

SECTION 5 MULTI-EDGE TOOL FUNCTION FOR 8-/12-ANGLE INDEXING

1. OverviewMACTURN 250/350/550:For machining using the tools fixed in one toolholder and equipped with 8 edges, it is necessary toindex each edge by orient-stopping the M-tool spindle at the fixed position in 45° pitch and to clampthe M-tool spindle.

MULTUS-B300/400:For machining using a tool having 12 edges in one holder, it is necessary to index each edge byorient-stopping the M-tool spindle at 30° pitch and clamp the M-tool spindle.

Since the max number of edges of one toolholder varies, the specifiable edge number differs fromthe tool group number.

By use of the multi-edge tool function for 8-/12-angle indexing, it is possible to index each edge byorient-stopping the M-tool spindle at 45° or 30° pitch with the turret rotation command and the edgeindexing command M602/M603 before clamping the M-tool spindle.

Multi-edge tool function Max number of edgesMACTURN250/350/550 8-angle indexing 8MULTUS-B300/400 12-angle indexing 12


2. Function

2-1. Tool Management

Tools are managed by “Holder Number” and “Edge Number”.

(1) “Holder Number (Tool number)”“Holder Number” is a number assigned to each toolholder. This number does not relate to thenumber of edges mounted in one toolholder. Holder Number is usually called as “Tool Number”.The toolholder numbers are 1 to 200 and 201 to 210.

(2) “Edge Number”Edge Number is from 1 to 8 or 1 to 12. When tools have different toolholder number, they areseparate tools even though the edge numbers are identical.

(3) Tool Designation Method for Each Function

• ATC command, ATC operationIn ATC command, a tool is called by specifying the toolholder number. When registeringthe tool mounted in the magazine, register it with the toolholder number.

• Turret rotation, edge indexingTo machine with one of the eight or twelve edges, specify the edge number and toolholdernumber in the turret rotation command. Before machining, index the necessary edge byissuing M602/M603 edge index command.

• Graphic display of toolsData Setting Screen is provided for each “Holder Number” and “Edge Number”. Input therequired tool data in the Data Setting Screen showing the relevant edge numbers.

• Life management of toolsData Setting Screen and Setting Item are provided for each “Holder Number” and “EdgeNumber”. Input the required tool data in the Data Setting Item and Data Setting Screenshowing the relevant edge numbers.

Tools for the toolholder No.1 to 200 : M-tool, gauging sensor, DT-tool, and L-tool with one edge

Tools for the toolholder No. 201 to 210 : L-tool with eight or twelve edges fixed in one toolholder.

Tools for the toolholder No. 1 to 200 : The edge number is not decided. However, in the control software, the edge number for those tools is assumed to be “one”.

Tools for the toolholder No. 201 to 210 : The edge number is assigned to each edge of eight or twelve tool edges. To set various tool data for each edge, input the required data into the field or setting screen which shows the relevant edge number.


2-2. Turret Rotation

(1) T/TL CommandIn the turret rotation command, specify the toolholder number and edge number. The T/TLcommand indexes the tool to the turret number (or the toolholder number), but does not indexthe edge***.

T ∆∆∆TL= ***

(2) Manual Turret RotationThe manual turret rotation command, specified in the cutting position index mode, indexes theturret, but does not index the edge. The edge index status before the action is remained.In ATC position index mode, the manual turret rotation does not index the edge. It performs M-tool spindle fixed position stop action to the ATC position.

(3) Tool Group Command Specified as the Turret Rotation Command (Tool Life ManagementFunction)To rotate the turret by designation of a tool group command, specify the tool group number. Thecommand format is the same with that of the machine without multi-edge tool function for 8-/12-angle indexing. The tool group number is in the range from 1 to 280 in multi-edge tool functionfor 8-angle indexing, and 1 to 320 in multi-edge tool function for 12-angle indexing.

TG=*** OG=∆∆∆

The TG command indexes a toolholder in the specified tool group, bit it does not index theedge.In the tool group (TG) command specified as the turret rotation command, the edge number isnot specified. This is because the indexed edge number by TG command is already decided, asthe tool group number is set for each edge number in the tool group No. 201 to 280 or 201 to320.

: Edge number (1 to 8 or 1 to 12, default: 1) ∆∆∆ : Turret Number (001 to 003 because the machine is equipped with H1 turret) : Tool offset number *** : Holder number

*** : Tool group number (1 to 280 or 1 to 320)∆∆∆ : Tool offset group number (1 to 3)

Tool group No.1 to 200 : Tool group for M-tool, gauging sensor, DT-tool, and L-tool with one edge

Tool group No. 201 to 280 or 201 to 320 : Tool group for L-tools with eight or twelve edges for each toolholder.


2-3. Edge Index Command

To index each edge, use the edge index command M602/M603.

“Edge Index Angle” is decided by the following expression, based on the M-tool spindle's fixedposition stop angle at tool exchange time.

“Edge Index Angle” = “M-tool spindle's fixed position stop angle at tool exchange time” + 360 / 8 * (“Edge Number” - 1)

“Edge Index Angle” = “M-tool spindle’s fixed position stop angle at tool exchange time” + 360 / 12 * (“Edge Number” - 1)

2-4. Interlock

When an L-tool or a sensor is mounted in the turret, the cutting feed command G01, G02, or G03 isnot executed unless the specified tool edge is indexed by T/TL/TG command. In this case, thefollowing alarm occurs.

“Alarm A 1730 Turret clamp or position”

M602 : M-tool spindle indexing clamp command for “Edge Index Angle”M603 : M-tool spindle indexing clamp command for “Edge Index Angle” + 180°

[Code] 4 → The command of cutting-feed was performed by the state that was not “M-tool spindle edge angle” when L-tool or sensor is registered with present-tool.


3. Tool Data Setting Screen

3-1. TOOL SHAPE Screen

This screen is provided to specify the graphic data in automatic operation and MDI operation mode.

Two screens are displayed in the tool data setting mode; “TOOL SHAPE” and “TOOL SHAPE 2”.

• “TOOL SHAPE” screenSet the tool shape data for each toolholder number.Data for one toolholder is displayed on one page.By pressing the page key, the toolholder number changes from 1 to 200, and the data for thenext toolholder number is displayed.

• “TOOL SHAPE 2” screen (Fig. 1-1)Set the tool shape data for each edge number of the toolholder number.Data for one edge is displayed on one page.By pressing page key, the toolholder number changes from 201 to 210, and the data for thenext toolholder number is displayed.By pressing the “EDGE CHANGE” function key, the edge changes for the displayed toolholder,and the data for the next edge is displayed.

LE32114R0401000060001

Tools for the toolholder No. 1 to 200 : Set the tool data for each toolholder number.Tools for the toolholder No. 201 to 210 : Set the tool data for each edge number.

Fig. 1-1 TOOL SHAPE 2


3-2. TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT Screen (for the Machine with Tool Life Management FUnction)

This screen is used to set the tool group number, tool offset number for each tool offset group, andlife conditions (“the number of machined parts”, “cutting time”, and “wear amount”) on the machinewith tool life management function.

Two screens are displayed in the Tool Data Setting mode; “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT” and “TOOLLIFE MANAGEMENT 2” screens.

• “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT” screenSet the data for each toolholder number.Data for 10 toolholders is displayed in one page.By pressing the Page key, the toolholder number is switched from 1 to 200, and the next 10toolholders' data is displayed.

• “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 2” screen (Fig. 1-2 to 1-4)Set data for each edge number of the toolholder number.Data for edges from 1 to 8 or 1 to 12 is displayed in one page.By pressing the Page key, the toolholder number is switched from 201 to 210, and the data foredges from 1 to 8 or 1 to 12 of the next toolholder number is displayed.

LE32114R0401000070001

Tools for the toolholder No. 1 to 200 : Set the data for each toolholder number.Tools for the toolholder No. 201 to 210 : Set the data for each edge number.

Fig.1-2 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 2 (NO. OF WORK)


LE32114R0401000070002

LE32114R0401000070003

Fig.1-3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 2 (CUTTING TIME)

Fig.1-4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 2 (WEAR AMOUNT)


3-3. GROUP TABLE Screen (for the Machine with Tool Life Manage-ment Function)

Display the “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT” screen and press the “GROUP TABLE” function key todisplay the “GROUP TABLE” screen.Display the “TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT 2” screen and press the “GROUP TABLE” function key todisplay the “GROUP TABLE 2” screen.

• “GROUP TABLE” screenData for group No. 1 to 200 is displayed.The registered toolholder numbers are displayed up to 12 for each group number.For the selected tool, the toolholder number registered in the group is displayed.

• “GROUP TABLE 2” screen (Fig. 1-5)Data for group No. 201 to 280 or 201 to 320 is displayed.The registered toolholder number and edge number are displayed up to 6 for each groupnumber.For the selected tool, the toolholder number and edge number registered in the group aredisplayed.

LE32114R0401000080001

Fig.1-5 GROUP TABLE 2


4. System Variable

4-1. Internal Tool Number

The multi-edge tool function for 8-/12-angle indexing sets, manages, and saves the tool data in theunit of “Holder Number + Edge Number.” Therefore, some system variables are not effective inreading or writing the tool data by designation of only the “Holder Number” as a subscript.To solve this problem, specify the “Internal Tool Number” as a subscript so that the NC can read orwrite the system variables.

“Internal Tool Number” is calculated by the following expression.

• When the toolholder number is from 1 to 200Internal Tool Number = Holder Number

• When the toolholder number is from 201 to 210Internal Tool Number = 200 + (Holder Number - 201) * 8 + Edge NumberInternal Tool Number = 200 + (Holder Number - 201) * 12 + Edge Number

Example : When designating the toolholder No. 201 and the edge No. 3, the internal tool number is as follows: 200 + (202 - 201) * 8 + 3 = 211 200 + (202 - 201) * 12 + 3 = 215


4-2. System Variable for Internal Tool Number

The following system variables specify the internal tool number as subscript.

a. Tool Shape

b. Tool Life Management

Variable Name ContentsVTLIN Tool classification codeVTLFN Tool shape codeVTLIB ATC second position tool classification codeVTLFB ATC second position tool shape codeVTLA1 Included angleVTLA2 Scrape angleVTLL Holder length/extension length/drill lengthVTLD Holder radius/drill radiusVTLW Byte wideVTLNR Edge radius

Variable Name ContentsVTLGN Group number of the holderVTLSN Setting number of holder life numberVTLCN Machining number of holder life numberVTLST Time setting of holder lifeVTLCT Cutting time of holder lifeVTLSA Wear-amount setting of holder lifeVTLCA Real wear-amount of holder lifeVTLUS Indicates that it was used in programVTLNG Indicates that the measurement was invalidVTLLF Indicates that the holder has come to the end of lifeVTOAA Tool offset number group 1 of the holderVTOBA Tool offset number group 2 of the holderVTOCA Tool offset number group 3 of the holderVTOAB Tool offset number group 1 of ATC second POS. holderVTOBB Tool offset number group 2 of ATC second POS. holderVTOCB Tool offset number group 3 of ATC second POS. holder


4-3. System Variable for Tool Group

The following system variables specify the tool group number.

a. Tool Shape

b. Tool Life Management

4-4. System Variable for Turret Number

The following system variable specifies the turret number.

4-5. System Variables with No Subscript

With the system variables, the current toolholder number and the edge number can be read.

Variable Name ContentsVGRIN Tool classification codeVGRFN Tool shape codeVGRIB ATC second position tool classification codeVGRFB ATC second position tool shape codeVGRA1 Included angleVGRA2 Scrape angleVGRL Holder length/extension length / drill lengthVGRD Holder radius/drill radiusVGRW Byte wideVGRNR Edge radius

Variable Name Contents RemarksVGRSL Holder number selected for the groupVGRTP Edge number selected for the group Newly addedVGRLF Tool Life flag of the groupVGRID Tool index occurrence flag of the group

Variable Name ContentsVTTLN Holder number of the current toolholder

Variable Name Contents RemarksVETLN Currently used holder numberVETLP Currently used edge number Newly added

5262-E P-227SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)

SECTION 6 NC TAILSTOCK (MULTUS-B300/B400)The NC tailstock function is used to automatically position the tailstock by providing the feed axis for thetailstock.The machine supports the workpiece by driving the motor of the tailstock.The tailstock supports the workpiece with the built-in screw thrust after moving to the work position andbraking.The tailstock is equipped with W-axis programming zero and variable limit since the tailstock is controlled asthe W-axis.

LE32114R0400700010001

- Negative variable limit

Sizing position

+ Positive variable limit

Approach Retract Retraction end

W-axis zero

1 (Rapid traverse)2 (Rapid traverse)3 (Approach feed)

4 (Rapid traverse) 5 (Rapid traverse)

Sizing position Approach Retract Retraction end

Spring


1. OperationThe tailstock can be operated by either of the two methods.

1-1. Setup Operation

The operator must set the sizing position of each workpiece even in setup operation.When cutting workpieces having different lengths, set the sizing position according to the workpiecelength. The sizing position is used for reference so that the tailstock can properly contact with theworkpiece.In this case, the work position must be set with manual operation in the teaching mode.(In the teaching mode, the “Teaching” button lamp turns ON and the beep sounds repeatedly.) Referto 5-1. “Setting the Sizing Position” for how to set the work position.

Operation range with the teaching mode ON: Negative variable limit to Positive limit

1-2. Ordinary Operation

In the ordinary operation, the workpiece is changed and re-supported.In this case, turn off the teaching mode and advance the tailstock in inching mode by the M-codecommand or manual operation so that the workpiece is supported with an appropriate thrust.

Operation range with the teaching mode OFF: Sizing position to Positive variable limit (retractionend)


2. Tailstock Movement

2-1. Manual Tailstock Movement

Press the “TAILSTOCK W-” or “TAILSTOCK W+” on the additional panel or use the foot pedal whenmanually moving the tailstock.

LE32114R0400700050001

The procedure to execute the work position command by using the foot pedal is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the + limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Turn the teaching mode OFF by manually pressing the “Teaching Mode” button on theadditional panel.(The teaching mode is turned off when the “Teaching” button lamp turns off and the beep stopssounding.)

4 Move the tailstock to the sizing position at the retraction side from the approach position andthe second step of the foot pedal advance for manual operation.

5 When the tailstock finishes moving to the sizing position, the “Sizing position” lamp turns ONand the beep sounds.

2-2. Automatic Tailstock Movement

The tailstock is moved with the M-code command.The M code command is executed when the teaching mode is turned off.

M56 ...... Tailstock Sizing position CommandM55 ...... Tailstock Retract Position CommandM847 ...... Tailstock Retraction End Position Command


3. Switching between High/Low Pressure

3-1. Switching between High/Low Pressure Command

The high/low pressure is switched with the M code command.

3-2. Operation

(1) Operation when executing the high/low switching command while positioning the workpiece.The workpiece is supported with the shrunken internal spring while the tailstock is in sizingposition mode.

LE32114R0400700080001

When the low pressure command is issued, the thrust is reduced by retracting the tailstock andexpanding the internal spring.

LE32114R0400700080002

When the high pressure command is issued, the thrust is increased by advancing the tailstockand shrinking the internal spring.

LE32114R0400700080003

(2) Operation when executing the high/low pressure switching command while the machine is notin sizing position modeThe tailstock does not operate with the high/low pressure switching command. It operates withthe commanded thrust when the sizing position command is issued or the second step for thefoot pedal advance is pedaled.

M98 ...... High pressure commandM99 ...... High pressure command


4. Multiple Sizing Position CommandA maximum of 10 positions can be set when the position or thrust is changed due to the workpiecelength and blank, etc.(Refer to 6. “Parameters”.)The multiple IN positions can be selected on the program.

4-1. Multiple Sizing Position Command

The multiple sizing position command is executed with the G code command.

LE32114R0400700100001

4-2. Operation

The tailstock moves to the position of the multiple sizing position number commanded when themultiple IN position command and tailstock operation command are executed.

4-3. Sequence Restoration (operation starting from the halfway of the program)

When the multiple sizing position numbers and the tailstock positions used before sequencerestoration and after restoration are not matched, sequence restoration is disabled.

G195 SP=@@ @@= Multiple Sizing position No.

<Program Example>N001 G00 X1000N002 G195 SP=1N003 M56N004 M3 S1000:N100 M5N101 M55

Moves the X-axis to the + limit.Multiple Sizing position command (No.1 command)Sizing position command (moving to the No.1 sizing position)

Retract position command (moving to the No.1 retract position)


5. Preparatory Operation

5-1. Setting the Sizing Position

Since the tailstock moves to the “sizing position”, an appropriate thrust cannot be obtained if the“Sizing Position” is not set correctly. The “Sizing Position” must be changed if the workpiece lengthchanges. The procedure to set the “Sizing position” is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the positive limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Turn the teaching mode ON by manually pressing the Teaching Mode button on the additionalpanel.

4 Press the NC TAILSTOCK button on the additional panel with manual operation to display theNC TAILSTOCK PARAMETER screen. (Refer to 6. “Parameters.”)

5 Set the position on which the workpiece does not contact to APPROACH.

6 Set the thrust to LOW or HIGH.

7 Moves the tailstock to the sizing position by using the second step for foot pedal advance at theposition located at the retraction side viewed from the approach position.

8 Moves the cursor to the “SIZING POSITION” and press the function key (CAL) when thetailstock is moved to the sizing position and the SIZING POSITION lamp is turned on.The position on which the tailstock contacts with the workpiece is entered in “Sizing position”when the CAL button is pressed (the position positioned before the internal spring slackensand the workpeice end face position are set.)

9 Set “-OK” and “+OK” for both side of the sizing position to judge the availability of the sizingposition.

[Supplement]

The NC tailstock function detects the motor torque and supports the workpiece withappropriate thrust.Therefore, the “APPROACH” must be set to at least 2 mm from the “+ OK” in the retractionside (+ side) in order to prevent false detection of the acceleration torque for the motor.


5-2. No-load Torque Measurement

The NC tailstock generates appropriate thrust by controlling the motor torque.Since the torque is lost to other than thrust due to slide resistance, the torque must be measured inadvance and the load must be monitored after subtracting the measured load from the motor torque.The procedure to measure the no-load torque is as follows.

Procedure :

1 Move the X-axis to the + limit to prevent interference.

2 Stop the spindle.

3 Press the NC TAILSTOCK button on the additional panel with manual operation to open theNC TAILSTOCK PARAMETER screen. (Refer to 6. “Parameters.”)

4 Set the position on which the workpiece does not contact to APPROACH.

5 Select “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ON” on the second page.

6 Press the TAILSTOCK W- button on the additional panel for manual operation at the retractionside viewed from the approach position to move the tailstock for 5 mm with the sizing positionspeed. In this case, the tailstock returns to the previous position.Once the tailstock slideway resistance teaching is executed, the “1. Tailstock slidewayresistance teaching ON” is automatically turned off.


6. Parameters

6-1. NC Tailstock User Parameter

Press the function selection key NC TAILSTOCK on the optional panel to open thefollowing one screen operation pop-up window.

[First page]

LE32114R0400700150001

(1) Tailstock Current Position DisplayThe current position of the program coordinate for the tailstock axis (W-axis) appears.

(2) Sizing position Number DisplayThe currently selected number appears with the multiple sizing position command (G195 SP= 1to 10). This display appears when the multiple sizing position command and the tailstockmovement command are executed.

(3) Diagnosis DisplayWhen the tailstock enters sizing position status with the sizing position command, the message“The tailstock reaches the sizing position and thrust.” appears.

(4) Thrust DisplayThe currently commanded thrust appears.If the same value is set for “HIGH” and “LOW”, only “low” appears.

(1) Tailstock Current Position Display

(2) Sizing position Number Display

(4) Thrust Display(5) Command Position Display

(3) Diagnosis Display


(5) Command Position Display

a. Sizing position...Input the sizing position for the tailstock with program coordinate systems.When the [CAL] button is pressed, the position where the tailstock touches a workpiece isinput.

b. -OK...Input the - side range of the sizing position of the tailstock.The amount of displacement from the sizing position is set.

c. +OK...Input the + side range of the sizing position of the tailstock.The amount of displacement from the sizing position is set.

d. Approach Position...Input the approach position for the tailstock with program coordinatesystems.

e. Retract position...Input the retract position for the tailstock with program coordinatesystems.

f. Low...Directly input the tailstock thrust on the low-pressure side.

g. High...Directly input the tailstock thrust on the high-pressure side.

Initial Value Setting Range Setting Rangea) Sizing position 0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999b) -OK 0.000 0.000 to 9.999c) +OK 0.000 0.000 to 9.999d) Approach Position 0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999e) Retract position 0.000 -99999.999 to 99999.999f) Low Specific to machine Specific to machineg) High Specific to machine Specific to machine


[Second Page]

LE32114R0400700150002

(1) Tailstock slideway resistance teaching ONSet this parameter when measuring no load motor torque.When the “TAILSTOCK W-” button on the additional panel for manual operation is pressed orthe first step of the foot pedal advance is pedaled at the retraction side viewed from theapproach position while this parameter is set, the tailstock moves for 5 mm with the sizingposition speed. In this case, the tailstock returns to the previous position.Once the tailstock slideway resistance is taught, the “1. Tailstock slideway resistance teachingON” is automatically turned off.


[Third page]

LE32114R0400700150003

(1) Speed 1Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the retract position.

(2) Speed 2Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the approach position.

(3) Speed 3Set the sizing position speed.

(4) Speed 4Set the movement speed from the sizing position to the retract position.

(5) Speed 5Set the movement speed from the retraction end to the retract position.

(Initial Value and Upper Limit Value when Override is set to 100%.) m/min

*1: Specific to machine

Mode M code Pedal/JOG Pedal JOG

OverrideDoor Open Close Open CloseDoor Interlock ON OFF ON/

OFF ON OFF ON/OFF

Operation No.

1 1.2 1.2 20*1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4Valid

2 1.2 1.2 10*1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4

3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Invalid4 1.2 1.2 20*1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4

Valid5 1.2 1.2 20*1 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.4

Spindle 5 Spindle 4 Spindle 3 Spindle 2 Spindle 1


6-2. NC Tailstock System Parameter

LE32114R0400700160001

(1) Tailstock Quill Expand/Shrink TimeSet the time for the spring built in the tailstock expands/shrinks (set at shipment).

(2) Tailstock Spring ForceSet the force for the spring built in the tailstock (set at shipment).

(3) Initial Quill Spring Shrink AmountSet the initial shrink amount of the spring built in the tailstock (set at shipment).

(4) No Load TorqueSet the torque value when no load is applied to the tailstock (set at shipment).

(5) Ball Screw LeadSet the ball screw lead to drive the tailstock (set at shipment).

Initial Value Setting Range0.02 0.00 to 10.00 [s]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 1 to 10000 [N/mm]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 10.0 [mm]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99.9 [%]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 1 to 100 [mm]


(6) Ball Screw EfficiencySet the ball screw efficiency to drive the tailstock (set at shipment).

(7) Motor Rated TorqueSet the motor rated torque to drive the tailstock (set at shipment).

(8) Torque Skip Position Read Delay TimeSet the servo system delay time for the torque (set at shipment).

(9) Work Touch Detect TorqueSet the threshold for detecting that the tailstock touches a workpiece (set at shipment).

(10) Ball Screw InertiaSet the ball screw inertia and coupling inertia (set at shipment).

(11) Low Thrust SpeedSet the sizing speed selected when the specified thrust command is equal to or lower than thepreset Low Thrust (set at shipment).

(12) Low ThrustSizing is performed at the Low Thrust Speed when the specified thrust command is equal to orlower than the value set here (set at shipment.)

(13) Low Speed Range for Tailstock RetractionSet the range in which the tailstock is retracted at low speed from a position advancedexceeding the approach position (set at shipment).

(14) Low Retraction SpeedSet the speed at which the tool is retracted from a position advanced exceeding the approachposition in the Low Speed Range (set at shipment).

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0.01 to 1.00

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 1 to 10000 [Ncm]

Initial Value Setting Range120 0 to 10000 [0.1msec]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99.9 [%]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99999.999 [kg mm sec2]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99.9 [m/min]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99.9 [kN]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99.9 [mm]

Initial Value Setting RangeSpecific to machine 0 to 99.9 [m/min]


7. Interlock(1) The alarm occurs when the operation command issued while operation conditions for the NC

tailstock are not met.

1749 Alarm A The tailstock status command is not correct

[Code]

1: The spindle is not stopped.2: The center workpiece is not selected.3: The M-tool spindle is not stopped.4: The C-axis is not stopped.5: The touch setter is not positioned at the retract position.6: The X-axis is not positioned at + limit.7: The tailstock is in tailstock teaching mode.

Conditions for “Stopping the Spindle”, “Stopping the M-tool spindle” and “Stopping the C-axis”are reset with M codes used for releasing the interlock.M167: Tailstock Interlock release ONM168: Tailstock Interlock release OFF

2371 Alarm B There is an error in the tailstock movement command

[Code]

8: The setting value of the set selected with the multiple sizing position command is unmatched.9: The sizing position command is executed while the brake is not released in the sizingposition area.10: The multiple sizing positions before sequence restart is not matched with the sizing positionafter sequence restart.11: There is an error in the multiple sizing position command.12. The NC tailstock no load torque teaching cycle command is issued at the - side viewed fromthe approach position.

2489 Alarm B NC Tailstock Prameter error.

[Code]

1: The currently effective multi-sizing number is other than 1 to 10.2: The [retract position] is set on a position retracted exceeding the W-axis positive variablelimit.3: The [approach position] is set on a position further backward than the [retract position].4: The position determined by [sizing position] + [range 2] is set on a position further backwardthan the [approach position].5: The position determined by [sizing position] - [range 1] is set on a position further forwardthan the W-axis negative variable limit.6: The set thrust is “0” kV.7: In the teaching mode, the [approach position] is set on a position further backward than theW-axis positive variable limit.


(2) The alarm activates when the high/low pressure switching command is executed while the high/low pressure switching command for the NC tailstock is issued.

8584 Alarm A Conditions for switching the tailstock thrust high/low pressure isnot satisfied

[Code]

1: The spindle is rotating.2: The M-tool spindle is rotating.3: The C-axis is rotating.

(3) The alarm activates when the tailstock does not enter sizing position mode after the sizingposition command was issued.

1367 Alarm A The NC tailstock is not in sizing position status

[Code]

1: When the command position (CON) does not reach the command torque before entering thesizing position area 1, the command torque is generated within the tailstock quill expand/shrinkTime.2: The torque higher than the set thrust is generated when the current position (APA) is movedto the + side viewed from the sizing position area 2.3: The torque exceeding the threshold is generated when the tailstock moves for the timeconstant (T1+T2)*1.25 + 48 msec from the approach position or movement start position.4: The current position is not within the sizing position area while the tailstock is in sizingposition status.5: The torque has once exceeded the threshold value and dropped.6: The excess of thrust caused by the motor inertia is larger than the commanded thrust.

2659 Alarm B The NC tailstock axis is not in sizing position status

[Code]

1: The current position (APA) is positioned at - side viewed from the sizing position area 1.Or the torque exceeding the threshold is generated when the current position (APA) is locatedat + side viewed from the sizing position area 2 with manual operation.

(4) The multiple sizing position command (G195) is issued when the NC tailstock type is not used.

2662 Alarm B There is no NC tailstock type

[Code]

None


(5) If the tailstock work holding confirmation input (iNCTSWH) goes off although the tailstock is inthe sizing position, the following alarm occurs:

1748 Alarm A Tailstock quill advance over

[Code]

3: On the machine with an NC tailstock, the tailstock quill has advanced excessively and the NCtailstock work holding confirmation signal went off.

2705 Alarm B Tailstock quill over advance

[Code]

3: On the machine with an NC tailstock, the tailstock quill has advanced excessively and the NCtailstock work holding confirmation signal went off.

(6) The tailstock work holding confirmation input (iNCSWH) is ON although the tailstock is in retractstate. If the tailstock advance command is issued in this state, the following alarm occurs:

1749 Alarm A Tailstock quill condition

[Code]

46: The tailstock work holding confirmation input (iNCSWH) is ON although the tailstock is notholding a workpiece. M56 was issued in this state.

5262-E P-243SECTION 7 OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION 7 OTHER FUNCTIONS

1. Description of Other Functions

1-1. Override for Internal Arc Cutting

In the cutter radius compensation mode, feedrate is controlled so that the feedrate along the toolcenter path will be the feedrate specified in a program.As the result, the tool moves along the programmed path at a feedrate different from the specifiedfeedrate.This function overrides the feedrate so that the feedrate along the programmed path will be equal tothe programmed feedrate only for internal arc cutting operation.(Cutting feedrate along the programmed path) = (Programmed feedrate)

LE32114R0400800010001

(1) ConditionsThe conditions to turn on the override function for internal arc cutting are indicated below.

• In the cutter radius compensation mode

• Internal arc cutting operation

(2) Actual Feedrate (Feedrate on Cutter Center Path)For internal arc cutting as shown in Fig. 3-1, actual feedrate on the cutter center path is calcu-lated as shown below.(Actual feedrate) = (Programmed feedrate) x rc/rp

r c

r p

Feedratespecified in aprogram

Tool path(Center of the tool9

Programmed path

Cutting feedrate along theprogrammed path

rc: Arc radius calculated by cutterdiameter compensationrp: Programmed arc radius


(3) OthersThis function is valid in the following four kinds of interpolation planes.If this function is specified while a plane other than those indicated below is selected, the func-tion is invalid.

• G17 X-Y plane (coordinate conversion function is used)

• G119 C-X-Z plane

• G138 & G17 X-Y plane (Y-axis function is used)

• G138 & G19 Y-Z plane (Y-axis function is used)

(4) Lower Limit of OverrideEven in internal arc cutting operation, there will be cases that do not require feedrate decelera-tion or operations in which cutting time should not be elongated unnecessarily. For these cases,set an appropriate value for the following parameter.OPTIONAL PARAMETER MULTIPLE MACHININGNo. 9 Lower limit of override for inside arc Setting range: 1 to 100 [%] Initial value: 100 [%]This sets the minimum value of the override to be applied to the programmed feedrate.If “rc/rp 100 t Parameter setting” in Fig.3-1, actual feedrate is calculated using the following for-mula.Actual feedrate = Programmed feedrate Parameter setting


1-2. Helical Cutting Function (Optional)

This function allows the machine to perform helical cutting on the planes selected with G17/G18/G19.76

(1) FormatThe command format for executing helical cutting in the G18 plane is explained below.For helical cutting in the G17/G19 plane, refer to the Programming Manual.In helical cutting in the G18 plane, linear interpolation of the Y-axis is synchronized with circularinterpolation in the Z-X plane.Programming Format

LE32114R0400800020001

G18: Z-X plane selection commandG02/G03: CW/CCW circular interpolation command

Feedrate of an infeed axis (Y-axis in this case) can be calculated using the following formula. [Infeed axis feedrate] = [Infeed axis movement distance] / [Arc length] [F command value]

(2) Cautions on programming helical cutting

• The helical cutting function can be specified in the Y-axis mode (G138).

• If the end point lies at the same point as the start point of the circle in the same plane, a fullcircle is generated.

• Note that a full circle cannot be defined using an L command.

• If a full circle command is executed continuously using the helical cutting commands,sequence joining processing is executed unconditionally. (Setting for optional parameter(bit) No. 69, bit 0 is disregarded.)

• Helical cutting is also possible in the slant face coordinate system as in the standard coor-dinate system.

X : End point of circle (XI-axis)Z : End point of circle (ZI-axis)I : Relative coordinate of the center of the circle in reference to the circle start point (XI-

axis)K : Relative coordinate of the center of the circle in reference to the circle start point (ZI-

axis)L : Radius of a circle (generates an arc with center angle of 180 or smaller)Y : Movement stroke along the Y-axis during circular interpolation (during the X-/Z-axis

movements from the start to end point of the circle)F : Feedrate for circular interpolation

G18 G94G02 X_ Z_ I_ K_ Y_ F(G03) (L_ )

5262-E P-246SECTION 8 APPENDIX

SECTION 8 APPENDIX

1. Logic Tables• Input Logic Table

• Output Logic Table

• Manual Interlock Table

• Cam Shaft Input Logic Table

• Cam Shaft Output Logic Table


MULTUS-B300/B400

LE32114R0400900010001


LE32114R0400900010002


LE32114R0400900010003


LE32114R0400900010004


LE32114R0400900010005


LE32114R0400900010006


MACTURN 550

LE32114R0400900010007


LE32114R0400900010008


LE32114R0400900010009


LE32114R0400900010010


LE32114R0400900010011


LE32114R0400900010012


LE32114R0400900010013

MacTurn550ATC logic table

2 2 6 680 40 02 01

150↓2↓↓54↓↓57↓↓

8786

↓↓

122↓↓

147↓↓

222↓↓

242↓↓

282↓↓

303

301

↓

↓

↓358

↓

Retracted state

Tool inserted

state

Tool gripping operation

Retraction

Retracted state

Tool gripped

stateTool

extracting operation

180° rotation

Tool extracted

state

Tool inserting operation

Tool gripped

state

Tool inserted

state ON

ON

OFF OFF

ON

Waiting for

signal ON

OFF ON

OFF

OFF

ON ON

OFF OFF

OFF

ONON

Waiting for

signal ON

360

CamAngle

Ope

ratio

n se

quen

ce N

o.

CAM AXIS INPUT LOGIC

EA

rot

atio

n

EA

inse

rt/e

xtra

ct

EA

tool

unl

ock

EA

tool

lock

T to

ol u

ncla

mp

T to

ol c

lam

p

Waiting for

signal ON

Waiting for

signal ON


LE32114R0400900010014

5 7 B B 7 7 701 02 02 01 10 08 04

15CamAngle

0↓2↓↓ ON54↓↓57↓↓87↓↓

122↓↓

147↓↓

222↓↓

242↓↓

282↓↓

303↓↓

358↓

OFF

OFF OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

360

MacTurn550ATC logic table

Ope

ratio

n se

quen

ce N

o.

CAM AXIS OUTPUT LOGIC

EA

rot

atio

n

EA

inse

rt/e

xtra

ct

EA

tool

unl

ock

T to

ol u

ncla

mp

T to

ol u

ncla

mp

with

low

pre

ssur

e

T T

ool C

lam

p

RS

air

Blo

w

ATC

air

Blo

w 1

ATC

air

Blo

w 2

(E

nd F

ace)

Retracted state

Tool inserted

state

Tool gripping operation

Tool gripped

stateTool

extracting operation

180° rotation

Tool extracted

state

Retraction

Retracted state

Tool inserting operation

Tool gripped

state

Tool inserted

state


MACTURN 250/350

LE32114R0400900010015

Mac

Tur

n 25

0/35

0 1

2 3

4 5

6A

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

Operation Sequence No.

INP

UT

LO

GIC

(1/2

)

MG Manual intervention OFFMG Tool existingMG Tool not existing

EA Return position

Shutter 2 open confirmationShutter 2 close confirmationRS Rotation tool change positionRS Rotation MG positionRS Tool insertRS Tool extractRS Tool existingRS Tool not existing

T Tool change position 1T Tool change position 2T ATC Position index complete

Shutter openShutter close

EA rotation completeT Tool existingT Tool not existingT Tool unclampT Tool clamp


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)

12

Mag

azin

e in

dexi

ng

2

3R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e

5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)

6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

78

Shu

tter

open

8

9T

ool c

hang

e

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

1112

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

Shu

tter

2 op

en

1213

RS

Mag

azin

e po

sitio

n13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n14

B-t

est d

ata

Aut

o-br

anch

dat

a6

Wai

ting

for

mac

hini

ng c

ompl

etio

n (N

ext t

ool r

etur

n cy

cle)

14

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion


LE32114R0400900010016

Mac

Tur

n 25

0/35

0 7

8 9

A B

CA

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


INP

UT

LO

GIC

(2/2

)

Tool attribute agreeM06 Tool change

Tool change (Large-dai. Tool)

M-tool spindle at orientation positionM228 Next tool cancel

Magazine index position agree

Step reverse interlockStep advance interlock


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)1

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

23

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

78

Shu

tter

open

8

9T

ool c

hang

e

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

S

hutte

r 2

open

1213

RS

Mag

azin

e po

sitio

n

1314

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

14

B-t

est d

ata

Aut

o-br

anch

dat

a6

Wai

ting

for

mac

hini

ng c

ompl

etio

n (N

ext t

ool r

etur

n cy

cle)

14R

S e

xtra

ctio

n


LE32114R0400900010017

Mac

Tur

n 25

0/35

0 1

2 3

4 5

6A

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


OU

TP

UT

LO

GIC

(1/2

)

Shutter 2 openShutter 2 closeRS Rotation tool change positionRS Rotation MG positionRS Tool insertRS Tool extract

Return cycle disabled

EA Speed adjustment


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)

12

Mag

azin

e in

dexi

ng

2

3R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e

5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)

6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

78

Shu

tter

open

89

Too

l cha

nge

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

10

11M

G In

dexi

ng r

etur

n po

t (R

S)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

S

hutte

r 2

open

12

13R

S M

agaz

ine

posi

tion

13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

14


LE32114R0400900010018

Mac

Tur

n 25

0/35

0 7

8 9

A B

CA

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


OU

TP

UT

LO

GIC

(2/2

)

M-tool spindle rotation disabledMagazine manual intervention enabled

MG Air blowRS Air blowATC Air blow 1ATC Air blow 2 FaceT Tool unclampManual Tool changeNext tool cancelMG Tool returnMG Tool extractionMG Index eneabledStored tool indexStored tool index (Turret side)Next tool writeNext tool index

EA rotation command

Step reverse disabledNC answer backAuto-branchStep timer BStep timer AATC Start positionM Pot stop at fixed positionShutter closeShutter open

Z-axis movement disabledY-axis movement disabledX-axis movement disabledM06 commande receive enabledSame MT command valid


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)1

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

23

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n3

4R

S T

ool c

hang

e po

sitio

n4

5R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

Shu

tter

2 cl

ose

56

Wai

ting

for

com

man

d (M

06)

67

MG

Sta

rt in

dexi

ng to

ol r

etur

n po

t (tu

rret

)7

8S

hutte

r op

en8

9T

ool c

hang

e

910

Shu

tter

clos

e

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

1112

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

Shu

tter

2 op

en

1213

RS

Mag

azin

e po

sitio

n13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n14


LE32114R0400900010019

Mac

Tur

n 25

0/35

0 1

2 3

4 5

6A

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


MA

NU

AL

INT

ER

LOC

K(1

/2)

Step Return

Return Cycle

MG Manual intervention OFFMG Tool existingMG Tool not existing

EA Return position

Shutter 2 open confirmationShutter 2 close confirmationRS Rotation tool change positionRS Rotation MG positionRS Tool insertRS Tool extractRS Tool existingRS Tool not existing

T Tool change position 1T Tool change position 2T ATC Position index complete

Shutter openShutter close

EA rotation completeT Tool existingT Tool not existingT Tool unclampT Tool clamp


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)

12

Mag

azin

e in

dexi

ng

2

3R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e

5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)

6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

7

8S

hutte

r op

en

89

Too

l cha

nge

910

Shu

tter

clos

e

10

11M

G In

dexi

ng r

etur

n po

t (R

S)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

S

hutte

r 2

open

12

13R

S M

agaz

ine

posi

tion

13

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

14

Man

ual s

tep

bran

ch9

Too

l cha

nge

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

Man

ual s

tep

back

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

9T

ool c

hang

e


LE32114R0400900010020

Mac

Tur

n 25

0/35

0 7

8 9

A B

CA

TC

Log

ic T

able

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201

8040

2010

0804

0201


MA

NU

AL

INT

ER

LOC

K(2

/2)

Step Return

Return Cycle

Tool attribute agreeM06 Tool change

Tool change (Large-dai. Tool)

M-tool spindle at orientation positionM228 Next tool cancel

Magazine index position agree

Step reverse interlockStep advance interlock


1W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(MT

)1

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

23

RS

Too

l ins

ertio

n

34

RS

Too

l cha

nge

posi

tion

45

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

S

hutte

r 2

clos

e5

6W

aitin

g fo

r co

mm

and

(M06

)6

7M

G S

tart

inde

xing

tool

ret

urn

pot (

turr

et)

78

Shu

tter

open

8

9T

ool c

hang

e

9

10S

hutte

r cl

ose

1011

MG

Inde

xing

ret

urn

pot (

RS

)

11

12R

S T

ool i

nser

tion

S

hutte

r 2

open

1213

RS

Mag

azin

e po

sitio

n

1314

RS

Too

l ext

ract

ion

14

Man

ual s

tep

bran

ch9

Too

l cha

nge

14R

S T

ool e

xtra

ctio

n

Man

ual s

tep

back

2M

agaz

ine

inde

xing

9T

ool c

hang

e


LE32114R0400900010021

MacTurn 250/350 6 6ATC Logic Table 02 01

Operation S

equence No.

EA

Rotation

EA

Insert/Extract

T-tool U

nclamp

T-tool C

lamp

9Cam Angle

Retractedstate

Tool grippingoperation

Toolextractingoperation

Waitingfor ON

Retraction

Retractedstate

Toolinserted

state

CAM AXIS INPUT LOGIC

Tool grippedstate

180˚rotation

Tool grippedstate

Waitingfor ON

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

Toolinserted

state


Toolinsertingoperation

0

2

60

75

112.5

140

220

247.5

285

300

358


LE32114R0400900010022

MacTurn 250/350 7ATC Logic Table 02

Operation S

equence No.

EA

Rotation

EA

Insert/Extract

T-tool U

nclamp

RS

Air B

low

AT

C A

ir Blow

1

AT

C A

ir Blow

2 (End F

ace)

9Cam Angle

Retractedstate

Tool grippingoperation

Toolextracted

state

Retraction

Retractedstate

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

Toolinserted

state

CAM AXIS OUTPUTLOGIC

Tool grippedstate

180˚ rotation

Tool grippedstate

ONTool

insertedstate


Toolinsertingoperation

0

2

60

75

112.5

140

220

247.5

285

300

358


2. ATC Input/Output Bit Tables

LE32114R0400900020001

INPUT

Portable pulse handle effective (CE)

Portable pulse handle ineffective (operation panel effective; CE)

Diagonal feed selection (MT)

Y-axis zero return

Y-axis manual feed

Y-axis manual feed

Y-axis mode

Y-axis selection for pulse handle

Signal name Address Label

[Panel input] <Machine with Y-axis or ATC>

I.008B

I.008A

I.016A

I.0164

I.0163

I.0162

I.0160

I.0161

I.0166

I.0165

I.0168

I.0169

I.018C

I.018D

I.0047

I.0046

I.020D

I.020C

I.020B

I.020A

I.0209

I.0208

I.0207

I.0206

I.021A

I.0219

I.0205

I.0204

I.0203

I.0202

I.0201

I.0200

ipHPHON

ipHPHOF

ipSLFED

ipYZPR

ipMNPY

ipMNNY

ipYMOD

ipPHY

ipMNPYB

ipMNNYB

ipVTOF

ipEAPS

ipWCL

ipWUC

ipCLAT4

ipCLMN4

ipMORQ

ipTIDA

ipTIDC

ipSGCY

ipRECY

ipSTFF

ipSTRE

ipAILOF

ipBFOFF

ipBFON

ipASHCL

ipASHOP

ipTCFT

ipTCRT

ipTTCL

ipTTUC

YB-axis manual +YB (HOB)

YB-axis manual -YB (HOB)

Orthogonal tool compensation 6/14add *1

ATC arm swing compensation

W-axis clamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

W-axis unclamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

1st coolant 4 auto

1st coolant 4 manual

Request for manual loading/unloading

Turret index to ATC position

Turret index to cutting position

1-cycle start

Return cycle start

1-step feed

1-step reverse

Interlock release

Bar feeder link OFF (CE)

Bar feeder link ON

ATC shutter close

ATC shutter open

Turret manual tool change L/Face mill/L (MT)

Turret manual tool change Side end mill/M tool (MT)

Turret tool clamp PB

Turret tool unclamp PB


LE32114R0400900020002

opSLFED

opMSPRE

opYMOD

opPHY

opVTOF

opBFON

opWCL

opWUC

opCLAT4

opCLMN4

opMORQ

opTIDA

opTIDC

opSGCY

opRECY

opSTFF

opSTRE

opAILOF

OUTPUT

[Panel output] <Machine with Y-axis or ATC>


0.010D

0.0105

0.0108

0.0109

0.010C

0.0147

0.011D

0.011E

0.0037

0.0036

0.0137

0.0136

0.0135

0.0134

0.0133

0.0132

0.0131

0.0130

Diagonal feed selection (MT)

M-tool spindle unclamp (H1) 6/10add *1

Y-axis mode

Y-axis selection for pulse handle

Not usable

Not usable

Orthogonal tool compensation 6/14add *1

Bar feeder link ON

W-axis clamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

W-axis unclamp (H1-W) 6/10add *1

1st coolant 4 auto

1st coolant 4 manual

Request for manual loading/unloading

Turret index to ATC position

Turret index to cutting position

1-cycle start

Return cycle start

1-step feed

1-step reverse

Interlock release

Not usable

Not usable


LE32114R0400900020003

iEOF/

iOPOF/

iSEA/

iTMA/

iOHA/

iOLA/

iCBA/

iEMSTP/

iOCL/

iOCA/

iCPA/

iCPAL/

iACBA/

iSOA/

iAOLA/

iBOF

iBOL

iESUE

iALM/

iSSP/

iTSP/

iSTR

iCTIM

iRST

iOIL/

iCIL/

iEMMON/

iESIN

iINCC

iMOCLAL/

iMOCAL/

I.1008

I.100C

I.1006

I.1004

I.1003

I.1001

I.1000

I.100B

I.1032

I.1031

I.1030

I.1011

I.138F

I.1033

I.138E

I.1025

I.1024

I.1045

I.1044

I.1043

I.1042

I.1041

I.1060

I.1040

I.1155

I.1126

I.1009

I.1151

I.1150

I.1129

I.1128

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model>


Emergency limit release/

Operation power OFF/

Travel end alarm/

CPU (control cabinet) temperature alarm/

Transformer overload alarm/

EC overload alarm/

EC circuit breaker alarm/

Emergency stop/

1st headstock oil cooler level alarm/

1st headstock oil cooler alarm/

1st spindle low chuck pressure/

Chip conveyor alarm/

ATC axis EC circuit breaker alarm/

Spindle lubricating oil low pressure/

ATC axis motor overload alarm/

Slideway lubricating oil flow

Slideway lubricating oil level low

External start impossible

External alarm/

External cycle stop/

External slide hold/

External start

Calendar timer input

External reset

1st spindle chuck interlock/

1st C-axis interlock/

Emergency stop monitor/

External command for 1st spindle CW in inching mode

External command for 1st spindle CCW in inching mode

M-tool spindle oil cooler level alarm/

M-tool spindle oil cooler alarm/ (H1)


LE32114R0400900020004

oCPCO

oNCRUN

oPWON1

oOPON1

oBKRLS2

oBKRLS1

oPWON2

oOPON2

oRUNO

oALMO

oPSP

oNCSTO

oNCUOF

oPWOF

oSDRPB

o2SDRPB

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model> Multi-port


O.1027

O.100D

O.1000

O.1004

O.1009

O.1008

O.1001

O.1005

O.1015

O.1014

O.1013

O.1012

O.100E

O.1029

O.1200

O.1210

Chip conveyor ON

NC running

Axis power ON 1

Axis operation ON 1

Axis brake release 2

Axis brake release 1

Axis power ON 2

Axis operation ON 2

Work lamp

Alarm lamp

Operation end lamp

Running lamp

NC unit power OFF

Auto power shutoff

1st safety door lock release (PL, CE)

2nd safety door lock release (PL, CE)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)

(Not usable)


LE32114R0400900020005

iCECHOPP

iCECHCLP

iSHADC

iSHRTC

iCHOPC

iCHCLC

iUDOPC

iUDCLC

iDROP/

iARW/

iOPA/

iOPAL/

iTSCL2

iTSCL1

iTSCPLMC

iTSCPRTC

iTSRTC

iTSLMC

iTSOAC

i2CPA/

iDRSRB/

iDPON

iDPOFF

i2SHADC

i2SHRTC

i2CHOPC

i2CHCLC

I.154D

I.154C

I.1251

I.1250

I.1159

I.1158

I.1217

I.1218

I.1212

I.102C

I.1020

I.1021

I.1278

I.1277

I.127A

I.1279

I.1275

I.1274

I.1273

I.1038

I.121F

I.1071

I.1070

I.1259

I.1258

I.1169

I.1168

INPUT

[EC output] [EC output]


MP2:

MP2:

MP2: 1st spindle chuck open confirmation PS

MP2: 1st spindle chuck close confirmation PS

MP2: 1st sensor arm advance position confirmation

MP2: 1st sensor arm retract position confirmation

MP2:1st spindle chuck open confirmation

MP2:1st spindle chuck close confirmation

MP14: 1st ceiling door open confirmation

MP14: 1st ceiling door close confirmation

MP14:

MP14: 1st door open confirmation/

MP14: Air source pressure confirmation/

MP14: Low hydraulic oil pressure/

MP14:

MP14: Hydraulic oil level low/

MP10: Tailstock clamp confirmation 2

MP10: Tailstock clamp confirmation 1

MP10: Connection ON, tailstock-saddle connect pin IN confirmation)

MP10: Connection OFF (tailstock-saddle connect pin OUT confirmation)

MP10: Tailstock retract confirmation

MP10: Tailstock sizing position confirmation

MP10: tailstock over-advance confirmation

2nd spindle low chuck pressure/

Door open/close safety rubber switch/

Sub hydraulic oil drain pump ON confirmation

Sub hydraulic oil drain pump OFF confirmation

2nd sensor arm advance position confirmation

2nd sensor arm retract position confirmation

2nd spindle chuck open confirmation

2nd spindle chuck close confirmation


LE32114R0400900020006

oCBKRL

oCHLP

oCCP

oCBRK

oCHOPO

oCHCLO

oATAB2

oATAB1

oARB

oRSPP1

oRSPP2

oRSSP

oRSMGP

o2ASHC

o2ASHO

oRSAB

oATESOF

oATESON

oASHC

oASHO

oBHP

oBLP

oBCL

oTUC

oLTCLC

oLTUCLC

oMUCL

oMCL

O.1104

O.1139

O.1103

O.1102

O.1134

O.1133

O.133D

O.133C

O.1171

O.1352

O.1353

O.1351

O.1350

O.133B

O.133A

O.1358

O.136A

O.1369

O.1333

O.1332

O.1071

O.1070

O.1084

O.1081

O.1365

O.1364

O.1109

O.1108

OUTPUT



MP1: 1st C-axis brake pressure release

MP1: 1st spindle chuck low pressure

MP1: 1st C-axis clamp

MP1: 1st C-axis brake

MP1:1st spindle chuck open

MP1:1st spindle chuck close

Mp3:

MP3: ATC air blow 2 (tool)

MP3: ATC air blow 1 (turret)

MP3: 1st air blow B (MT thru)

MP4: Tool insertion by RS in standby position 1

(MT30)

MP4: Tool extraction by RS in standby position 2

(MT30)

MP4: RS swing to tool change position

MP4: RS swing to MG position

MP5: ATC shutter close 2

MP5: ATC shutter open 2

MP5:

MP5: RS air blow

MP5: ATC escape OFF

MP5: ATC escape ON

MP5: ATC shutter close

MP5: ATC shutter open

MP6: B-axis brake OFF (NC-B)

MP6: B-axis low-pressure brake (NC-B)

MP6: B-axis high-pressure brake OFF (MC-B) (H2)

MP6: A-turret unclamp

MP6: Tool clamp (MT20)

MP6: Tool unclamp (MT20)


LE32114R0400900020007

iLTCLC

iLTUCLC

iMUCLC6

iMUCLC5

iMUCLC4

iMUCLC3

iMUCLC2

iMUCLC1

iMGPH

iMGIN

iMGOF

iTOLDS

iTOLPAL/

iTOLLAL/

iRSPP1

iRSPP2

iRSSP

iRSMGP

iRSTO

iMGTO

i2ASHC

i2ASHO

iUSM8A

iUSM7A

iUSM6A

iUSM5A

iUSM4A

iUSM3A

iUSM2A

iUSM1A

I.1375

I.1374

I.112F

I.112E

I.112D

I.112C

I.112B

I.112A

I.1389

I.138A

I.138B

I.1067

I.1066

I.1065

I.1365

I.1366

I.1362

I.1361

I.1360

I.137A

I.1391

I.1390

I.1307

I.1306

I.1305

I.1304

I.1303

I.1302

I.1301

I.1300

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model> Multi-port


Tool clamp confirmation (MT30/50)

Tool unclamp confirmation (MT30/50)

M-tool spindle unclamp confirmation 6 (H1)






MG operation disabled

MG manual interrupt ON

MG manual interrupt OFF

Turret oil mist lube drop sensor (MT30/50)

Turret oil mist lube pressure alarm/ (MT30/50)

Turret oil mist lube level alarm (MT30/50)

MP11: Tool insertion by RS in standby position 1 (MT30)

MP11: Tool extraction by RS in standby position 2 (MT30)

MP11: RS swing to tool change position confirmation

MP11: RS swing to MG position confirmation

MP11: RS tool exists

MP11:ATC MG no-tool confirmation

MP11: ATC shutter close confirmation 2

MP11: ATC shutter open confirmation 2

M108 answer

M107 answer

M106 answer

M105 answer

M104 answer

M103 answer

M102 answer

M101 answer


LE32114R0400900020008

oTSLP

oTSUC

oTSRTO

oTSADO

o2CBKRL

o2CHLP

o2CCP

o2CBRK

o2CHOPO

o2CHCLO

o2TUC

oTABR

oTOLPAR

oTOLAR

oMGMI

oMGDLC

oUSM8

oUSM7

oUSM6

oUSM5

oUSM4

oUSM3

oUSM2

oUSM1

O.1252

O.1255

O.1251

O.1250

O.1114

O.1149

O.1113

O.1112

O.1144

O.1143

O.1089

O.108F

O.1060

O.1061

O.1339

O.1366

O.1287

O.1286

O.1285

O.1284

O.1283

O.1282

O.1281

O.1280

OUTPUT



MP7: Tailstock quill low pressure

MP7: Tailstock unclamp

MP7: Tailstock quill retract

MP7: Tailstock quill advance

MP9: 2nd C-axis brake depressurization

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck low pressure

MP9: 2nd C-axis clamp

MP9: 2nd C-axis brake

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck open

MP9: 2nd spindle chuck close

B-turret B unclamp

T-axis brake release

Turret oil mist lube pump drive air ON (MT30/50)

Turret oil mist lubrication air ON (MT30/50)

MG manual interruption ON

MG door lock output (MT30/50)

M108

M107

M106

M105

M104

M103

M102

M101


LE32114R0400900020009

i2CHP2

i2CHP1

iTHSFC

iTSRF

iTSA2

iTSA1

iCHP2

iCHP1

i2OCL/

i2OCA/

iMG1CL

iMG1LK

iDRCL/

iDRCL

i2CIL/

iBULC

iBCLC

iLTN

iASHC

iASHO

iTUCA

iTCLA

i2TUC

i2TCL

iCETSADP

iCE2CHOPP

iCE2CHCLP

I.1167

I.1166

I.1075

I.1272

I.1271

I.1270

I.1157

I.1156

I.103A

I.1039

I.1383

I.1382

I.1214

I.1210

I.1127

I.109A

I.109B

I.1377

I.1387

I.1386

I.1091

I.1090

I.1093

I.1092

I.1549

I.154F

I.154E

INPUT

[EC input] <Standard model>


2nd spindle chuck pedal 2

2nd spindle chuck pedal 1

Thru spindle filter clogged

Tailstock retraction pedal

Tailstock advance pedal 2 (hold)

Tailstock advance pedal 1 (inching)

1st spindle chuck pedal 2

1st spindle chuck pedal 1

2nd spindle oil cooler level alarm/

2nd spindle oil cooler alarm/

MG door 1 close confirmation

MG door 1 lock confirmation

1st door close confirmation/

1st door close confirmation

2nd C-axis interlock/

B-axis high-pressure brake release confirmation PS

B-axis clamp confirmation LS

No-tool confirmation

MP12:

MP12: ATC shutter close confirmation

MP12:ATC shutter open confirmation

A-turret unclamp confirmation

A-turret clamp confirmation

B-turret unclamp confirmation

B-turret clamp confirmation

MP8:

MP8: Tailstock advance confirmation PS

MP8: 2nd spindle chuck open confirmation PS

MP8: 2nd spindle chuck close confirmation PS


LE32114R0400900020010

oDPMT

oMOCON

oCLPU

o2CLI

oCPCLPU

oCLMT

oBOMT

oHYMON

oUDOP

oUDCL

oARE

oWKC

oINM3

oINM2

oINM1

oARMPO

oCMAO

oSHAD

oSHRT

o2ARA

oARA

oDROP

oDRCL

oACLMTL

oACL1

oARD

oARC

O.1023

O.110A

O.1192

O.1188

O.1194

O.1184

O.1022

O.1020

O.1206

O.1207

O.1174

O.1039

O.1032

O.1031

O.1030

O.1024

O.112E

O.1231

O.1230

O.1178

O.1170

O.1203

O.1202

O.1191

O.1180

O.1173

O.1172

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model>


Sub hydraulic oil drain pump ON motor

M-tool spindle oil cooler ON (H1)

Suction pump

2nd coolant 1 (lower turret)

Chip flusher pump

Upper turret coolant pump

Slideway lubricating oil motor

Hydraulic motor ON

1st ceiling door open

1st ceiling door close

1st air blow E

Work count

Hourmeter 3

Hourmeter 2

Hourmeter 1

MP13: Air source pressure ON

MP13: 1st spindle chucking error detection air

MP13:1st sensor arm advance

MP13:1st sensor arm retract

MP13:2nd air blow A

MP13:1st air blow A

MP13:1st door open

MP13: 1st door close

1st coolant 1 (M-tool coolant)

1st coolant 1 (thru/L)

1st air blow D (touch setter/sensor air blow)

1st air blow C (touch setter/sensor air blow)


LE32114R0400900020011

iSOPO

iSCSF

iEXOR

iTRST

iSQAL/

iPCSBA

iPCSFR

iPCBA

iPCFR

iEARE

iEARD

iEARC

iEARB

iETSAD

iETSRT

iEDROP

iEDRCL

iTLB8

iTLB7

iTLB6

iTLB5

iTLB4

iTLB3

iTLB2

iTLB1

I.1154

I.1153

I.1152

I.1480

I.1010

I.128B

I.128A

I.1289

I.1288

I.1204

I.1203

I.1202

I.1201

I.127D

I.127C

I.1216

I.1215

I.110F

I.110E

I.110D

I.110C

I.110B

I.110A

I.1109

I.1108

INPUT

[EC input] <Options> <Standard model>


1st spindle orientation pin OUT confirmation

1st spindle orientation pin IN confirmation

External command for 1st spindle orientation

CEJ transfer start

Sequencer alarm/

MP21: Parts catcher slide retract confirmation

MP21: Parts catcher slide advance confirmation

MP21: Parts catcher retract confirmation

MP21: Parts catcher advance confirmation

External command for 1st air blow E

External command for 1st air blow D (touch setter)

External command for 1st air blow C (touch sensor)

External command for 1st air blow B

External command for tailstock quill advance

External command for tailstock quill retract

External command for 1st door open

External command for 1st door close

B-turret LS 8

B-turret LS 7

B-turret LS 6

B-turret LS 5

B-turret LS 4

B-turret LS 3

B-turret LS 2

B-turret LS 1


LE32114R0400900020012

oSSPP

oSCSP

oSPSP

oPCSBA

oPCSFR

oPCBAB

oPCFRB

oTADO

oTRTO

oDROPC

oDRCLC

oCHOPC

oCHCLC

o2TCC

o2TCW

O.1132

O.1131

O.1130

O.1261

O.1260

O.1263

O.1262

O.1254

O.1253

O.1205

O.1204

O.1138

O.1137

O.108B

O.108A

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Standard model>


1st spindle orientation pin IN/brake ON

1st spindle orientation being executed

1st spindle being stopped

MP21: Parts catcher slide retract

MP21: Parts catcher slide advance

MP21: Parts catcher retract

MP21: Parts catcher advance

Tailstock quill sizing confirmation output

Tailstock quill retract confirmation output

1st door open confirmation output

1st door close confirmation output

1st spindle chuck unclamp confirmation output

1st spindle chuck clamp confirmation output

B-turret CCW

B-turret CW


LE32114R0400900020013

iTIDRT

iTIDAD

iSACL

iSAWP

iSAMGP

iSARSP

iSAIN

iSAOU

iMTCLC

iMTUCLC

iMTCCL

iMTCUCL

iMTN

I.137F

I.137E

I.1347

I.1344

I.1343

I.1342

I.1341

I.1340

I.1373

I.1372

I.1379

I.1378

I.1376

INPUT

[EC input] <Machine with ATC> <MacTurn type>


TOOL-ID retract confirmation

TOOL-ID advance confirmation

Sub arm clamp (MT30)

Sub arm standby position confirmation

Sub arm magazine position confirmation

Sub arm ready station position confirmation

Sub arm tool insertion confirmation

Sub arm tool extraction confirmation

M-tool clamp confirmation (MT30/50)

M-tool unclamp confirmation (MT30/50)

MTC magazine tool clamp (MT50)

MTC magazine tool unclamp (FT SW) (MT50)

No M-tool


LE32114R0400900020014

oTIDRT

oTIDAD

oSAUCL

oSACL

oSAMA

oSAMB

oSAMC

oSAMD

oSAIN

oSAOU

oMTCLC

oMTUCLC

oMTCUCL

O.133F

O.133E

O.134B

O.134A

O.1342

O.1343

O.1344

O.1345

O.1341

O.1340

O.1363

O.1362

O.1368

OUTPUT

[EC output] <Machine with ATC> <MacTurn type>


TOOL-ID retract

TOOL-ID advance

Sub arm unclamp (MT30)

Sub arm clamp (MT30)

Sub arm travel A

Sub arm travel B

Sub arm travel C

Sub arm travel D

Sub arm insertion

Sub arm extraction

M-tool clamp (MT50)

M-tool projection (MT50)

MTC magazine tool unclamp (MT50)


3. List of Data Formats

3-1. Tool data setting (T)

Data Kind ID Code

Data No. G13/G14 Content of Data Remarks

Tool offset T1 1-32(64)(64)

G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (YI-axis)

Load monitorreference

value

T12 1-64 G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis) Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (Spindle No. 1)M (M-axis)W (W-axis)B (Spindle No. 2)Y (YI-axis)

Load monitorfirst limit

value


G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (Spindle No. 1)M (M-axis)W (W-axis)B (Spindle No. 2)Y (YI-axis)

Load monitorsecond limit

value


G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (Spindle No. 1)M (M-axis)W (W-axis)B (Spindle No. 2)Y (YI-axis)


3-2. Zero point data setting (0)

Data Kind ID Code


Zero point 01 1-2 G13/G14 X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)W (W-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (YI-axis)

N1: Zero offsetN2: Zero shift

Ball screw pitch

02 1 G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis) Z (Z-axis)S (YS-axis)

Pitch error compensa-

tion

03 1-120 G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (YS-axis)

Zero point of spindle No.2

04 1-2 G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)S (YS-axis)Y(YI-axis)

N1: Zero offsetN2: Zero shift


3-3. Parameter setting (P)

Data Kind ID Code


User parameter

P1 1-9 G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)W (W-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (YI-axis)

N1: Positive variable limit (P)N2: Negative variable limit (P)N3: Positive variable limit (M)N4: Negative variable limit (M)N9: Droop data

Systemparameter

P3 1-23 G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13G13

G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

X (X-axis) Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)W (W-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (YI-axis)I (Rapid feedrate)J (Manual feedrate)K (Slowdown time)L (Encoder offset)M (Backlash)N (In-position)O (Unclamp timer)

N1: Positive stroke end limitN2: Negative stroke end limitN3: BacklashN4: Encoder connection off-setN5: Positive sensor posi-tion (P)N6: Negative sensor posi-tion (P)N7: Positive sensor posi-tion (M)N8: Negative sensor posi-tion (M)N9: Reference ring positionN10: ATC tool change posi-tionN11: Encoder offsetN12: Rapid feedrate unit amountN13: Rapid feedrate accel-eration unit amountN14: Manual feedrate unit amountN15: Manual feed accelera-tion unit amountN16: Machine zero offsetN17: Torque set valueN18: Positive stroke offset amountN19: Negative stroke offset amountN20: ATC tool change posi-tion AN21: ATC tool change posi-tion BN22: ATC tool change posi-tion CN23: NC turret control parameterData from I to 0 are set only at N23


Turret position

P4 1-12(20)

G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (YI-axis)

Home position

P14 1-8 G13/G14G13/G14

G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)Y (YS-axis)

User parameterfor spindle

No.2

P16 1-9 G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14G13/G14

G13G13

X (X-axis)Z (Z-axis)C (C-axis)W (W-axis)S (YS-axis)Y (Yl-axis)

N1: Positive variable limit (P)N2: Negative variable limit (P)N3: Positive variable limit (M)N4: Negative variable limit (M)N9: Droop data

Y-axis control

parameter

P24 1-8 G13G13G13G13

X (Xl-axis)Z (Zl-axis)Y (Yl-axis)R (Data)

N1: Rapid feedrate unit amountN2: Rapid feedrate acceler-ation unit amountN3: Manual feedrate unit amountN4: Manual feedrate accel-eration unit amountN5: Torque set valueN6: YS-X angle dataN7: YS-axis spindle center position

Data Kind ID Code


LIST OF PUBLICATIONS

Publication No. Date Edition

5262-E January 2006 1st

5262-E-R1 July 2006 2nd

5262-E-R2 October 2006 3rd

5262-E-R3 February 2007 4th

This manual may be at variance with the actual product due to specification or design changes.Please also note that specifications are subject to change without notice.If you require clarification or further explanation of any point in this manual, please contact your OKUMA representative.

Documents

OSP-P200L Macturn+Multus Series Operation Manual LE32-114-R4